104
48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service and Maintenance Instructions TABLE OF CONTENTS SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS 1 .................... UNIT ARRANGEMENT AND ACCESS 2 ........... SUPPLY FAN (BLOWER) SECTION 4 .............. COOLING 6 .................................... PURONR (R-410A) REFRIGERANT 8 .............. THERMOSTATIC EXPANSION VALVE (TXV) 9 ..... COOLING CHARGING CHARTS 10 ................ CONVENIENCE OUTLETS 14 .................... SMOKE DETECTORS 15 ......................... PROTECTIVE DEVICES 23 ....................... GAS HEATING SYSTEM 23 ...................... PREMIERLINKCONTROL 35 ................... RTU-MP CONTROL SYSTEM 43 .................. ECONOMIZER SYSTEMS 56 ..................... WIRING DIAGRAMS 65 ......................... PRE-START-UP 71 .............................. START-UP, GENERAL 71 ........................ START-UP, PREMIERLINKCONTROLS 73 ....... START-UP, RTU-MP CONTROL 73 ................ OPERATING SEQUENCES 76 ..................... FASTENER TORQUE VALUES 87 ................. APPENDIX I. MODEL NUMBER SIGNIFICANCE 88 . APPENDIX II. PHYSICAL DATA 89 ................ APPENDIX III. FAN PERFORMANCE 93 ........... APPENDIX IV. ELECTRICAL DATA 99 ............. APPENDIX V. MOTORMASTER SENSOR LOCATIONS 102 ................................ UNIT START-UP CHECKLIST 104 ................. SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS Installation and servicing of air-conditioning equipment can be hazardous due to system pressure and electrical components. Only trained and qualified service personnel should install, repair, or service air-conditioning equipment. Untrained personnel can perform the basic maintenance functions of replacing filters. Trained service personnel should perform all other operations. When working on air-conditioning equipment, observe precautions in the literature, tags and labels attached to the unit, and other safety precautions that may apply. Follow all safety codes. Wear safety glasses and work gloves. Use quenching cloth for unbrazing operations. Have fire extinguishers available for all brazing operations. Follow all safety codes. Wear safety glasses and work gloves. Use quenching cloth for brazing operations. Have fire extinguisher available. Read these instructions thoroughly and follow all warnings or cautions attached to the unit. Consult local building codes and National Electrical Code (NEC) for special requirements. Recognize safety information. This is the safety-alert symbol . When you see this symbol on the unit and in instructions or manuals, be alert to the potential for personal injury. Understand the signal words DANGER, WARNING, and CAUTION. These words are used with the safety-alert symbol. DANGER identifies the most serious hazards which will result in severe personal injury or death. WARNING signifies a hazard which could result in personal injury or death. CAUTION is used to identify unsafe practices which may result in minor personal injury or product and property damage. NOTE is used to highlight suggestions which will result in enhanced installation, reliability, or operation.

Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

  • Upload
    others

  • View
    4

  • Download
    0

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

48HC*04---09Nominal 3 to 8.5 TonsWith Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant

Service and Maintenance Instructions

TABLE OF CONTENTSSAFETY CONSIDERATIONS 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

UNIT ARRANGEMENT AND ACCESS 2. . . . . . . . . . .

SUPPLY FAN (BLOWER) SECTION 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

COOLING 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PURONR (R--410A) REFRIGERANT 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

THERMOSTATIC EXPANSION VALVE (TXV) 9. . . . .

COOLING CHARGING CHARTS 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CONVENIENCE OUTLETS 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SMOKE DETECTORS 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PROTECTIVE DEVICES 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GAS HEATING SYSTEM 23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PREMIERLINK™ CONTROL 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RTU--MP CONTROL SYSTEM 43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ECONOMIZER SYSTEMS 56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

WIRING DIAGRAMS 65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PRE--START--UP 71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

START--UP, GENERAL 71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

START--UP, PREMIERLINK™ CONTROLS 73. . . . . . .

START--UP, RTU--MP CONTROL 73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

OPERATING SEQUENCES 76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FASTENER TORQUE VALUES 87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

APPENDIX I. MODEL NUMBER SIGNIFICANCE 88.

APPENDIX II. PHYSICAL DATA 89. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

APPENDIX III. FAN PERFORMANCE 93. . . . . . . . . . .

APPENDIX IV. ELECTRICAL DATA 99. . . . . . . . . . . . .

APPENDIX V. MOTORMASTER SENSORLOCATIONS 102. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

UNIT START-UP CHECKLIST 104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SAFETY CONSIDERATIONSInstallation and servicing of air-conditioning equipmentcan be hazardous due to system pressure and electricalcomponents. Only trained and qualified service personnelshould install, repair, or service air-conditioningequipment. Untrained personnel can perform the basicmaintenance functions of replacing filters. Trained servicepersonnel should perform all other operations.

When working on air-conditioning equipment, observeprecautions in the literature, tags and labels attached tothe unit, and other safety precautions that may apply.Follow all safety codes. Wear safety glasses and workgloves. Use quenching cloth for unbrazing operations.Have fire extinguishers available for all brazingoperations.

Follow all safety codes. Wear safety glasses and workgloves. Use quenching cloth for brazing operations. Havefire extinguisher available. Read these instructionsthoroughly and follow all warnings or cautions attached tothe unit. Consult local building codes and NationalElectrical Code (NEC) for special requirements.

Recognize safety information. This is the safety--alertsymbol . When you see this symbol on the unit and ininstructions or manuals, be alert to the potential forpersonal injury.

Understand the signal words DANGER, WARNING, andCAUTION. These words are used with the safety--alertsymbol. DANGER identifies the most serious hazardswhich will result in severe personal injury or death.WARNING signifies a hazard which could result inpersonal injury or death. CAUTION is used to identifyunsafe practices which may result in minor personalinjury or product and property damage. NOTE is used tohighlight suggestions which will result in enhancedinstallation, reliability, or operation.

Page 2: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

2

FIRE, EXPLOSION HAZARDFailure to follow this warning could result inpersonal injury, death and/or property damage.

Refer to the User’s Information Manual providedwith this unit for more details.

Do not store or use gasoline or other flammablevapors and liquids in the vicinity of this or any otherappliance.

What to do if you smell gas:DO NOT try to light any appliance.DO NOT touch any electrical switch, or use anyphone in your building.IMMEDIATELY call your gas supplier from aneighbor’s phone. Follow the gas supplier’sinstructions.If you cannot reach your gas supplier, call the firedepartment.

! WARNING

ELECTRICAL OPERATION HAZARDFailure to follow this warning could result in personalinjury or death.

Before performing service or maintenance operationson unit, turn off main power switch to unit. Electricalshock and rotating equipment could cause injury.

! WARNING

ELECTRICAL OPERATION HAZARDFailure to follow this warning could result in personalinjury or death.

Units with convenience outlet circuits may usemultiple disconnects. Check convenience outlet forpower status before opening unit for service. Locateits disconnect switch, if appropriate, and open it.Tag--out this switch, if necessary.

! WARNING

UNIT OPERATION AND SAFETY HAZARDFailure to follow this warning could cause personalinjury, death and/or equipment damage.

Puron (R--410A) refrigerant systems operate at higherpressures than standard R--22 systems. Do not useR--22 service equipment or components on Puronrefrigerant equipment.

! WARNING

FIRE, EXPLOSION HAZARDFailure to follow this warning could result in personalinjury or death.

Disconnect gas piping from unit when pressure testingat pressure greater than 0.5 psig. Pressures greaterthan 0.5 psig will cause gas valve damage resulting inhazardous condition. If gas valve is subjected topressure greater than 0.5 psig, it must be replacedbefore use. When pressure testing field-supplied gaspiping at pressures of 0.5 psig or less, a unit connectedto such piping must be isolated by closing the manualgas valve(s).

! WARNING

UNIT ARRANGEMENT ANDACCESS

General

Fig. 1 and Fig. 2 show general unit arrangement andaccess locations.

FILTER ACCESS PANEL

OUTDOOR-AIR OPENING ANDINDOOR COIL ACCESS PANEL

COMPRESSORACCESS PANEL (04-07 only)

C08449

Fig. 1 -- Typical Access Panel Locations

BLOWERACCESSPANEL

CONTROL BOXCOMPRESSOR(08-09 only)

C10266

Fig. 2 -- Blower Access Panel Location

Routine Maintenance

These items should be part of a routine maintenanceprogram, to be checked every month or two, until aspecific schedule for each can be identified for thisinstallation:

48HC

Page 3: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

3

Quarterly Inspection (and 30 days after initialstart)

S Return air filter replacement

S Outdoor hood inlet filters cleaned

S Belt tension checked

S Belt condition checked

S Pulley alignment checked

S Fan shaft bearing locking collar tightness checked

S Condenser coil cleanliness checked

S Condensate drain checked

Seasonal Maintenance

These items should be checked at the beginning of eachseason (or more often if local conditions and usagepatterns dictate):

Air Conditioning

S Condenser fan motor mounting bolts tightness

S Compressor mounting bolts

S Condenser fan blade positioning

S Control box cleanliness and wiring condition

S Wire terminal tightness

S Refrigerant charge level

S Evaporator coil cleaning

S Evaporator blower motor amperage

Heating

S Heat exchanger flue passageways cleanliness

S Gas burner condition

S Gas manifold pressure

S Heating temperature rise

Economizer or Outside Air Damper

S Inlet filters condition

S Check damper travel (economizer)

S Check gear and dampers for debris and dirt

Air Filters and Screens

Each unit is equipped with return air filters. If the unit hasan economizer, it will also have an outside air screen. If amanual outside air damper is added, an inlet air screenwill also be present.

Each of these filters and screens will need to beperiodically replaced or cleaned.

Return Air Filters

Return air filters are disposable fiberglass media type.Access to the filters is through the small lift--out panellocated on the rear side of the unit, above theevaporator/return air access panel. (See Fig. 1.)

To remove the filters:

1. Grasp the bottom flange of the upper panel.2. Lift up and swing the bottom out until the panel dis-engages and pulls out.

3. Reach inside and extract the filters from the filterrack.

4. Replace these filters as required with similar replace-ment filters of same size.

To re--install the access panel:

1. Slide the top of the panel up under the unit top panel.2. Slide the bottom into the side channels.3. Push the bottom flange down until it contacts the topof the lower panel (or economizer top).

IMPORTANT: DO NOT OPERATE THE UNITWITHOUT THESE FILTERS!

Outside Air Hood

Outside air hood inlet screens are permanentaluminum--mesh type filters. Check these for cleanliness.Remove the screens when cleaning is required. Clean bywashing with hot low--pressure water and soft detergentand replace all screens before restarting the unit. Observethe flow direction arrows on the side of each filter frame.

Economizer Inlet Air Screen

This air screen is retained by spring clips under the topedge of the hood. (See Fig. 3.)

17 1/4”

DIVIDER

BAROMETRICRELIEF

CLEANABLEALUMINUMFILTER

FILTER

HOOD

FILTERCLIP

OUTSIDEAIR

C06027

Fig. 3 -- Filter Installation

To remove the filter, open the spring clips. Re--install thefilter by placing the frame in its track, then closing thespring clips.

48HC

Page 4: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

4

Manual Outside Air Hood Screen

This inlet screen is secured by a retainer angle across thetop edge of the hood. (See Fig. 4.)

C07156

Fig. 4 -- Screens Installed on Outdoor--Air Hood(Sizes 7--1/2 to 8--1/2 Tons Shown)

To remove the screen, loosen the screws in the top retainerand slip the retainer up until the filter can be removed.Re--install by placing the frame in its track, rotating theretainer back down and tighten all screws.

SUPPLY FAN (BLOWER) SECTION

ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARDFailure to follow this warning could cause personalinjury or death.

Before performing service or maintenance operationson the fan system, shut off all unit power and tag--outthe unit disconnect switch. Do not reach into the fansection with power still applied to unit.

! WARNING

Supply Fan (Belt--Drive)

The supply fan system consists of a forward--curvedcentrifugal blower wheel on a solid shaft with twoconcentric type bearings, one on each side of the blowerhousing. A fixed--pitch driven pulley is attached to the fanshaft and an adjustable--pitch driver pulley is on themotor. The pulleys are connected using a “V” type belt.(See Fig. 5.)

C07087

Fig. 5 -- Belt Drive Motor Mounting

Belt

Check the belt condition and tension quarterly. Inspect thebelt for signs of cracking, fraying or glazing along theinside surfaces. Check belt tension by using a spring--forcetool (such as Browning’s Part Number “Belt TensionChecker” or equivalent tool); tension should be 6--lbs at a5/8--in. deflection when measured at the centerline of thebelt span. This point is at the center of the belt whenmeasuring the distance between the motor shaft and theblower shaft.

NOTE: Without the spring--tension tool, place a straightedge across the belt surface at the pulleys, then deflect thebelt at mid--span using one finger to a 1/2--in. deflection.

Adjust belt tension by loosening the motor mounting platefront bolts and rear bolt and sliding the plate toward thefan (to reduce tension) or away from fan (to increasetension). Ensure the blower shaft and the motor shaft areparallel to each other (pulleys aligned). Tighten all boltswhen finished.

To replace the belt:

1. Use a belt with same section type or similar size. Donot substitute a “FHP” type belt. When installing thenew belt, do not use a tool (screwdriver or pry--bar) toforce the belt over the pulley flanges, this will stressthe belt and cause a reduction in belt life.

2. Loosen the motor mounting plate front bolts and rearbolts.

3. Push the motor and its mounting plate towards theblower housing as close as possible to reduce the cen-ter distance between fan shaft and motor shaft.

4. Remove the belt by gently lifting the old belt overone of the pulleys.

5. Install the new belt by gently sliding the belt overboth pulleys and then sliding the motor and plateaway from the fan housing until proper tension isachieved.

6. Check the alignment of the pulleys, adjust if neces-sary.

7. Tighten all bolts.8. Check the tension after a few hours of runtime andre--adjust as required.

Adjustable--Pitch Pulley on Motor

The motor pulley is an adjustable--pitch type that allows aservicer to implement changes in the fan wheel speed tomatch as--installed ductwork systems. The pulley consistsof a fixed flange side that faces the motor (secured to themotor shaft) and a movable flange side that can be rotatedaround the fixed flange side that increases or reduces thepitch diameter of this driver pulley. (See Fig. 6.)

As the pitch diameter is changed by adjusting the positionof the movable flange, the centerline on this pulley shiftslaterally (along the motor shaft). This creates arequirement for a realignment of the pulleys after anyadjustment of the movable flange. Also reset the belttension after each realignment.

48HC

Page 5: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

5

Check the condition of the motor pulley for signs of wear.Glazing of the belt contact surfaces and erosion on thesesurfaces are signs of improper belt tension and/or beltslippage. Pulley replacement may be necessary.

To change fan speed:

1. Shut off unit power supply.2. Loosen belt by loosening fan motor mounting nuts.(See Fig. 5.)

3. Loosen movable pulley flange setscrew. (See Fig. 6.)4. Screw movable flange toward fixed flange to increasespeed and away from fixed flange to decrease speed.Increasing fan speed increases load on motor. Do notexceed maximum speed specified.

5. Set movable flange at nearest keyway of pulley huband tighten setscrew to torque specifications.

To align fan and motor pulleys:

1. Loosen fan pulley setscrews.2. Slide fan pulley along fan shaft. Make angular align-ment by loosening motor from mounting.

3. Tighten fan pulley setscrews and motor mountingbolts to torque specifications.

4. Recheck belt tension.

C07075

Fig. 6 -- Supply--Fan Pulley Adjustment

Bearings

This fan system uses bearings featuring concentric splitlocking collars. The collars are tightened through a capscrew bridging the split portion of the collar. The capscrew has a Torx T25 socket head. To tighten the lockingcollar: Hold the locking collar tightly against the innerrace of the bearing and torque the cap screw to 65--70in--lb (7.4--7.9 Nm). See Fig. 7.

C08121

Fig. 7 -- Tightening Locking Collar

Motor

When replacing the motor, also replace the external--toothlock washer (star washer) under the motor mounting base;this is part of the motor grounding system. Ensure theteeth on the lock washer are in contact with the motor’spainted base. Tighten motor mounting bolts to 120 +/-- 12in--lbs.

Changing fan wheel speed by changing pulleys: Thehorsepower rating of the belt is primarily dictated by thepitch diameter of the smaller pulley in the drive system(typically the motor pulley in these units). Do not install areplacement motor pulley with a smaller pitch diameterthan provided on the original factory pulley. Change fanwheel speed by changing the fan pulley (larger pitchdiameter to reduce wheel speed, smaller pitch diameter toincrease wheel speed) or select a new system (bothpulleys and matching belt(s)).

Before changing pulleys to increase fan wheel speed,check the fan performance at the target speed and airflowrate to determine new motor loading (bhp). Use the fanperformance tables or use the Packaged Rooftop Buildersoftware program. Confirm that the motor in this unit iscapable of operating at the new operating condition. Fanshaft loading increases dramatically as wheel speed isincreased.

To reduce vibration, replace the motor’s adjustable pitchpulley with a fixed pitch pulley (after the final airflowbalance adjustment). This will reduce the amount ofvibration generated by the motor/belt--drive system.

48HC

Page 6: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

6

COOLING

UNIT OPERATION AND SAFETY HAZARDFailure to follow this warning could cause personalinjury, death and/or equipment damage.

This system uses PuronR refrigerant which hashigher pressures than R--22 and other refrigerants. Noother refrigerant may be used in this system. Gaugeset, hoses, and recovery system must be designed tohandle Puron refrigerant. If unsure about equipment,consult the equipment manufacturer.

! WARNING

Condenser Coil

The condenser coil is fabricated with round tube copperhairpins and plate fins of various materials and/or coatings(see Model Number Format in the Appendix to identifythe materials provided in this unit). The coil may beone--row or composite--type two--row. Composite two--rowcoils are two single--row coils fabricated with a singlereturn bend end tubesheet.

Condenser Coil Maintenance and CleaningRecommendation

Routine cleaning of coil surfaces is essential to maintainproper operation of the unit. Elimination of contaminationand removal of harmful residues will greatly increase thelife of the coil and extend the life of the unit. Thefollowing maintenance and cleaning procedures arerecommended as part of the routine maintenance activitiesto extend the life of the coil.

Remove Surface Loaded Fibers

Surface loaded fibers or dirt should be removed with avacuum cleaner. If a vacuum cleaner is not available, asoft non--metallic bristle brush may be used. In eithercase, the tool should be applied in the direction of the fins.Coil surfaces can be easily damaged (fin edges can beeasily bent over and damage to the coating of a protectedcoil) if the tool is applied across the fins.

NOTE: Use of a water stream, such as a garden hose,against a surface loaded coil will drive the fibers and dirtinto the coil. This will make cleaning efforts moredifficult. Surface loaded fibers must be completelyremoved prior to using low velocity clean water rinse.

Periodic Clean Water Rinse

A periodic clean water rinse is very beneficial for coilsthat are applied in coastal or industrial environments.However, it is very important that the water rinse is madewith a very low velocity water stream to avoid damagingthe fin edges. Monthly cleaning as described below isrecommended.

Routine Cleaning of Coil Surfaces

Periodic cleaning with TotalineR environmentally soundcoil cleaner is essential to extend the life of coils. Thiscleaner is available from Carrier ReplacementComponents Division as part number P902--0301 for a onegallon container, and part number P902--0305 for a 5gallon container. It is recommended that all coils,including standard aluminum, pre--coated, copper/copperor E--coated coils be cleaned with the Totalineenvironmentally sound coil cleaner as described below.Coil cleaning should be part of the unit’s regularlyscheduled maintenance procedures to ensure long life ofthe coil. Failure to clean the coils may result in reduceddurability in the environment.

Avoid use of:

S coil brighteners

S acid cleaning prior to painting

S high pressure washers

S poor quality water for cleaning

Totaline environmentally sound coil cleaner isnonflammable, hypo allergenic, non bacterial, and aUSDA accepted biodegradable agent that will not harmthe coil or surrounding components such as electricalwiring, painted metal surfaces, or insulation. Use ofnon--recommended coil cleaners is strongly discouragedsince coil and unit durability could be affected.

One--Row Coil

Wash coil with commercial coil cleaner. It is notnecessary to remove top panel.

Two--Row Coils

Clean coil as follows:

1. Turn off unit power, tag disconnect.2. Remove top panel screws on condenser end of unit.3. Remove condenser coil corner post. See Fig. 8. Tohold top panel open, place coil corner post betweentop panel and center post. See Fig. 9.

C08205

Fig. 8 -- Cleaning Condenser Coil

48HC

Page 7: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

7

C08206

Fig. 9 -- Propping Up Top Panel

4. Remove screws securing coil to compressor plate andcompressor access panel.

5. Remove fastener holding coil sections together at re-turn end of condenser coil. Carefully separate the out-er coil section 3 to 4 in. from the inner coil section.See Fig. 10.

C08207

Fig. 10 -- Separating Coil Sections

6. Use a water hose or other suitable equipment to flushdown between the 2 coil sections to remove dirt anddebris. Clean the outer surfaces with a stiff brush inthe normal manner.

7. Secure inner and outer coil rows together with afield--supplied fastener.

8. Reposition the outer coil section and remove the coilcorner post from between the top panel and centerpost. Reinstall the coil corner post and replace allscrews.

Totaline Environmentally Sound Coil CleanerApplication Equipment

S 2--1/2 gallon garden sprayer

S Water rinse with low velocity spray nozzle

UNIT DAMAGE HAZARDFailure to follow this caution may result in reducedunit performance or unit shutdown.

High velocity water from a pressure washer, gardenhose, or compressed air should never be used toclean a coil. The force of the water or air jet willbend the fin edges and increase airside pressure drop.

CAUTION!

UNIT DAMAGE HAZARDFailure to follow this caution may result in acceleratedcorrosion of unit parts.

Harsh chemicals, household bleach or acid or basiccleaners should not be used to clean outdoor or indoorcoils of any kind. These cleaners can be very difficultto rinse out of the coil and can accelerate corrosion atthe fin/tube interface where dissimilar materials are incontact. If there is dirt below the surface of the coil,use the Totaline environmentally sound coil cleaner.

CAUTION!

Totaline Environmentally Sound Coil CleanerApplication Instructions

1. Proper eye protection such as safety glasses is recom-mended during mixing and application.

2. Remove all surface loaded fibers and dirt with a vacu-um cleaner as described above.

3. Thoroughly wet finned surfaces with clean water anda low velocity garden hose, being careful not to bendfins.

4. Mix Totaline environmentally sound coil cleaner in a2--1/2 gallon garden sprayer according to the instruc-tions included with the cleaner. The optimum solutiontemperature is 100_F.

NOTE: Do NOT USE water in excess of 130_F, as theenzymatic activity will be destroyed.5. Thoroughly apply Totaline environmentally soundcoil cleaner solution to all coil surfaces includingfinned area, tube sheets and coil headers.

6. Hold garden sprayer nozzle close to finned areas andapply cleaner with a vertical, up--and--down motion.Avoid spraying in horizontal pattern to minimize po-tential for fin damage.

7. Ensure cleaner thoroughly penetrates deep into finnedareas.

8. Interior and exterior finned areas must be thoroughlycleaned.

9. Finned surfaces should remain wet with cleaningsolution for 10 minutes.

10. Ensure surfaces are not allowed to dry before rinsing.Reapplying cleaner as needed to ensure 10--minutesaturation is achieved.

11. Thoroughly rinse all surfaces with low velocity cleanwater using downward rinsing motion of water spraynozzle. Protect fins from damage from the spraynozzle.

Evaporator Coil

Cleaning the Evaporator Coil

1. Turn unit power off. Install lockout tag. Removeevaporator coil access panel.

2. If economizer or two--position damper is installed, re-move economizer by disconnecting Molex plug andremoving mounting screws.

48HC

Page 8: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

8

3. Slide filters out of unit.4. Clean coil using a commercial coil cleaner or dish-washer detergent in a pressurized spray canister. Washboth sides of coil and flush with clean water. For bestresults, back--flush toward return--air section to re-move foreign material. Flush condensate pan aftercompletion.

5. Reinstall economizer and filters.6. Reconnect wiring.7. Replace access panels.

Evaporator Coil Metering Devices

The metering devices are multiple fixed--bore devices(Acutrolt) swedged into the horizontal outlet tubes fromthe liquid header, located at the entrance to eachevaporator coil circuit path. These are non--adjustable.Service requires replacing the entire liquid headerassembly.

To check for possible blockage of one or more of thesemetering devices, disconnect the supply fan contactor(IFC) coil, then start the compressor and observe thefrosting pattern on the face of the evaporator coil. A frostpattern should develop uniformly across the face of thecoil starting at each horizontal header tube. Failure todevelop frost at an outlet tube can indicate a plugged or amissing orifice.

Refrigerant System Pressure Access Ports

There are two access ports in the system -- on the suctiontube near the compressor and on the discharge tube nearthe compressor. These are brass fittings with black plasticcaps. The hose connection fittings are standard 1/4 SAEmale flare couplings.

The brass fittings are two--piece High Flow valves, with areceptacle base brazed to the tubing and an integralspring--closed check valve core screwed into the base.(See Fig. 11.) This check valve is permanently assembledinto this core body and cannot be serviced separately;replace the entire core body if necessary. Service tools areavailable from RCD that allow the replacement of thecheck valve core without having to recover the entiresystem refrigerant charge. Apply compressor refrigerantoil to the check valve core’s bottom o--ring. Install thefitting body with 96 +/ --10 in--lbs of torque; do notovertighten.

PURONR (R--410A) REFRIGERANTThis unit is designed for use with Puron (R--410A)refrigerant. Do not use any other refrigerant in thissystem. Puron (R--410A) refrigerant is provided in pink(rose) colored cylinders.

These cylinders are available with and without dip tubes;cylinders with dip tubes will have a label indicating thisfeature. For a cylinder with a dip tube, place the cylinderin the upright position (access valve at the top) whenremoving liquid refrigerant for charging. For a cylinderwithout a dip tube, invert the cylinder (access valve on thebottom) when removing liquid refrigerant.

Because Puron (R--410A) refrigerant is a blend, it isstrongly recommended that refrigerant always be removedfrom the cylinder as a liquid. Admit liquid refrigerant intothe system in the discharge line. If adding refrigerant intothe suction line, use a commercial metering/expansiondevice at the gauge manifold; remove liquid from thecylinder, pass it through the metering device at the gaugeset and then pass it into the suction line as a vapor. Do notremove Puron (R--410A) refrigerant from the cylinder as avapor.

Refrigerant Charge

Amount of refrigerant charge is listed on the unit’snameplate. Refer to Carrier GTAC2--5 Charging,Recovery, Recycling and Reclamation training manualand the following procedures.

Unit panels must be in place when unit is operating duringthe charging procedure.

No Charge

Use standard evacuating techniques. After evacuatingsystem, weigh in the specified amount of refrigerant.

Low--Charge Cooling

Using Cooling Charging Charts, Fig. 13, vary refrigerantuntil the conditions of the appropriate chart are met. Notethe charging charts are different from type normally used.Charts are based on charging the units to the correctsubcooling for the various operating conditions. Accuratepressure gauge and temperature sensing device arerequired. Connect the pressure gauge to the service porton the liquid line. Mount the temperature sensing deviceon the liquid line and insulate it so that outdoor ambienttemperature does not affect the reading. Indoor--air cfmmust be within the normal operating range of the unit.

To Use Cooling Charging Charts

Take the outdoor ambient temperature and read the liquidpressure gauge. Refer to chart to determine what liquidtemperature should be. If liquid temperature is low, addrefrigerant. If liquid temperature is high, carefully recoversome of the charge. Recheck the liquid pressure as chargeis adjusted.

48HC

Page 9: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

9

1/2-20 UNF RH

30

0.596

.475/8” HEX

SEAT CORE

WASHERDEPRESSOR PER ARI 720+.01/-.035 FROM FACE OF BODY

7/16-20 UNF RH

O-RING

45

torqued into the seat. Appropriate handling is required to not scratch or dent the surface.

1/2" HEX

This surface provides a metal to metal seal when

o

o

(Part No. EC39EZ067)

C08453

Fig. 11 -- CoreMax Access Port Assembly

SIZE DESIGNATION NOMINAL TONSREFERENCE

A04 3

A05 4

A06 5

A07 6

A08 7.5

A09 8.5

EXAMPLE:

Model 48HC*A04

Outdoor Temperature 85_F (29_C). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Suction Pressure 140 psig (965 kPa). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Suction Temperature should be 60_F (16_C). . . . . . . . . .

Suction Temperature should be 60_F (16_C). . . . . . . . . .

THERMOSTATIC EXPANSIONVALVE (TXV)

All 48HC’s have a factory installed nonadjustablethermostatic expansion valve (TXV). The TXV will be abi-flow, bleed port expansion valve with an externalequalizer. TXVs are specifically designed to operate withPuronR or R-22 refrigerant, use only factory authorizedTXVs. Do not interchange Puron and R-22 TXVs.

TXV Operation

The TXV is a metering device that is used in airconditioning and heat pump systems to adjust to changingload conditions by maintaining a preset superheattemperature at the outlet of the evaporator coil.

Replacing TXV

1. Recover refrigerant.2. Remove TXV support clamp using a 5/l6-in. nutdriver.

3. Remove TXV using a backup wrench on connectionsto prevent damage to tubing.

4. Remove equalizer tube from suction line of coil. Usefile or tubing cutter to cut brazed equalizer line ap-proximately 2 inches above suction tube.

5. Remove bulb from vapor tube inside cabinet.6. Install the new TXV using a wrench and backupwrench to avoid damage to tubing or valve to attachTXV to distributor.

7. Attach equalizer tube to suction line. If coil hasmechanical connection, then use wrench and back upwrench to attach. If coil has brazed connection, usefile or tubing cutters to remove mechanical flare nutfrom equalizer line. Then use coupling to braze theequalizer line to stub (previous equalizer line) in suc-tion line.

8. Attach TXV bulb in the same location as original (inthe sensing bulb indent) was when removed, usingsupplied bulb clamps. See Fig. 12.

C10372

Fig. 12 -- Sensing Bulb Indent

9. Route equalizer tube through suction connectionopening (large hole) in fitting panel and install fittingpanel in place.

10. Sweat inlet of TXV marked “IN” to liquid line. Avoidexcessive heat which could damage valve.

48HC

Page 10: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

10

COOLING CHARGING CHARTS

Add Charge if Above the Curve

Remove Charge if Below the Curve

CHARGING CHART - R410A REFRIGERANTCOOLING MODE - OUTDOOR FAN MUST BE RUNNING

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600

Compressor Discharge Pressure, [psig]

)F seergeD( ,erutarepmeT gnivaeL lioC roodtuO

48TM502520 REV. -

C10252

Fig. 13 -- Cooling Charging Charts -- 3 Ton

10253

Fig. 13 -- Cooling Charging Charts -- 4 Ton

48HC

Page 11: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

11

COOLING CHARGING CHARTS (cont.)

Add Charge if Above the Curve

Remove Charge if Below the Curve

CHARGING CHART - R410A REFRIGERANTCOOLING MODE - OUTDOOR FAN MUST BE RUNNING

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600

Compressor Discharge Pressure, [psig]

)F seergeD( ,erutarepmeT gnivaeL lioC roodtuO

48TM502522 REV. -

C10254

Fig. 13 -- Cooling Charging Charts -- 5 Ton

Add Charge if Above the Curve

Remove Charge if Below the Curve

CHARGING CHART - R410A REFRIGERANTCOOLING MODE-ALL OUTDOOR FANS MUST BE RUNNING

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600

Compressor Discharge Pressure, [psig]

)F

se

er

ge

D(

,

er

uta

re

pmeT

g

ni

va

eL

l

io

C ro

od

tu

O

48TM502680 rev. -

C10255

Fig. 13 -- Cooling Charging Charts -- 6 Ton

48HC

Page 12: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

12

COOLING CHARGING CHARTS (cont.)

Add Charge if Above the Curve

Remove Charge if Below the Curve

CHARGING CHART - R410A REFRIGERANTCOOLING MODE-ALL OUTDOOR FANS MUST BE RUNNING

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600

Compressor Discharge Pressure, [psig]

)F

seer

geD

( ,

er

utarep

me

T g

nivae

L l

ioC

ro

od

tuO

48TM502681 rev. -

C10256

Fig. 13 -- Cooling Charging Charts -- 7.5 Ton

Add Charge if Above the Curve

Remove Charge if Below the Curve

CHARGING CHART - R410A REFRIGERANTCOOLING MODE-ALL OUTDOOR FANS MUST BE RUNNING

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600

Compressor Discharge Pressure, [psig]

)F

se

er

geD

( ,er

uta

rep

me

T g

ni

vaeL lioC roodtuO

48TM502682 rev. -

C10257

Fig. 13 -- Cooling Charging Charts -- 8.5 Ton

48HC

Page 13: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

13

Table 1 – Cooling Service Analysis

PROBLEM CAUSE REMEDY

Compressor and CondenserFan Will Not Start.

Power failure. Call power company.Fuse blown or circuit breaker tripped. Replace fuse or reset circuit breaker.Defective thermostat, contactor, transformer,or control relay. Replace component.

Insufficient line voltage. Determine cause and correct.Incorrect or faulty wiring. Check wiring diagram and rewire correctly.Thermostat setting too high. Lower thermostat setting below room temperature.

Compressor Will Not Start ButCondenser Fan Runs.

Faulty wiring or loose connections in compres-sor circuit. Check wiring and repair or replace.

Compressor motor burned out, seized, orinternal overload open. Determine cause. Replace compressor.

Defective run/start capacitor, overload, startrelay. Determine cause and replace.

One leg of three---phase power dead. Replace fuse or reset circuit breaker. Determinecause.

Compressor Cycles (otherthan normally satisfying ther-mostat).

Refrigerant overcharge or undercharge. Recover refrigerant, evacuate system, and rechargeto nameplate.

Defective compressor. Replace and determine cause.Insufficient line voltage. Determine cause and correct.Blocked condenser. Determine cause and correct.Defective run/start capacitor, overload, or startrelay. Determine cause and replace.

Defective thermostat. Replace thermostat.Faulty condenser--- fan motor or capacitor. Replace.Restriction in refrigerant system. Locate restriction and remove.

Compressor OperatesContinuously.

Dirty air filter. Replace filter.Unit undersized for load. Decrease load or increase unit size.Thermostat set too low. Reset thermostat.Low refrigerant charge. Locate leak; repair and recharge.Leaking valves in compressor. Replace compressor.Air in system. Recover refrigerant, evacuate system, and recharge.Condenser coil dirty or restricted. Clean coil or remove restriction.

Excessive Head Pressure.

Dirty air filter. Replace filter.Dirty condenser coil. Clean coil.Refrigerant overcharged. Recover excess refrigerant.Air in system. Recover refrigerant, evacuate system, and recharge.Condenser air restricted or air short---cycling. Determine cause and correct.

Head Pressure Too Low.Low refrigerant charge. Check for leaks; repair and recharge.Compressor valves leaking. Replace compressor.Restriction in liquid tube. Remove restriction.

Excessive Suction Pressure.High head load. Check for source and eliminate.Compressor valves leaking. Replace compressor.Refrigerant overcharged. Recover excess refrigerant.

Suction Pressure Too Low.

Dirty air filter. Replace filter.Low refrigerant charge. Check for leaks; repair and recharge.Metering device or low side restricted. Remove source of restriction.

Insufficient evaporator airflow. Increase air quantity. Check filter and replace ifnecessary.

Temperature too low in conditioned area. Reset thermostat.Outdoor ambient below 25° F. Install low---ambient kit.

Evaporator Fan Will Not ShutOff. Time off delay not finished. Wait for 30---second off delay.

Compressor Makes ExcessiveNoise. Compressor rotating in wrong direction. Reverse the 3---phase power leads.

48HC

Page 14: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

14

Compressor

Lubrication

The compressor is charged with the correct amount of oilat the factory.

UNIT DAMAGE HAZARDFailure to follow this caution may result in damage tocomponents.

The compressor is in a PuronR refrigerant system anduses a polyolester (POE) oil. This oil is extremelyhygroscopic, meaning it absorbs water readily. POEoils can absorb 15 times as much water as other oilsdesigned for HCFC and CFC refrigerants. Avoidexposure of the oil to the atmosphere.

CAUTION!

Replacing Compressor

The compressor used with Puron refrigerant contains aPOE oil. This oil has a high affinity for moisture. Do notremove the compressor’s tube plugs until ready to insertthe unit suction and discharge tube ends.

Compressor mounting bolt torque is 65--75 ft--lbs.

Compressor Rotation

On 3--phase units with scroll compressors, it is importantto be certain compressor is rotating in the properdirection. To determine whether or not compressor isrotating in the proper direction:

1. Connect service gauges to suction and discharge pres-sure fittings.

2. Energize the compressor.3. The suction pressure should drop and the dischargepressure should rise, as is normal on any start--up.

NOTE: If the suction pressure does not drop and thedischarge pressure does not rise to normal levels:4. Note that the evaporator fan is probably also rotatingin the wrong direction.

5. Turn off power to the unit.6. Reverse any two of the unit power leads.7. Reapply power to the compressor.

The suction and discharge pressure levels should nowmove to their normal start--up levels.

NOTE: When the compressor is rotating in the wrongdirection, the unit makes an elevated level of noise anddoes not provide cooling.

Filter Drier

Replace whenever refrigerant system is exposed toatmosphere. Only use factory specified liquid--line filterdriers with working pressures no less than 650 psig. Donot install a suction--line filter drier in liquid line. Aliquid--line filter drier designed for use with Puronrefrigerant is required on every unit.

Condenser--Fan Adjustment1. Shut off unit power supply. Install lockout tag.2. Remove condenser--fan assembly (grille, motor, andfan).

3. Loosen fan hub setscrews.4. Adjust fan height as shown in Fig. 14.5. Tighten setscrews.6. Replace condenser--fan assembly.

Conduit

0.14 in + 0.0 / -0.03

C08448

Fig. 14 -- Condenser Fan Adjustment

Troubleshooting Cooling System

Refer to Table 1 for additional troubleshooting topics.

CONVENIENCE OUTLETS

ELECTRICAL OPERATION HAZARDFailure to follow this warning could result in personalinjury or death.

Units with convenience outlet circuits may usemultiple disconnects. Check convenience outlet forpower status before opening unit for service. Locateits disconnect switch, if appropriate, and open it.Tag--out this switch, if necessary.

! WARNING

Two types of convenience outlets are offered on 48HCmodels: Non--powered and unit--powered. Both typesprovide a 125--volt GFCI (ground--faultcircuit--interrupter) duplex receptacle rated at 15--Abehind a hinged waterproof access cover, located on theend panel of the unit. See Fig. 15.

48HC

Page 15: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

15

Pwd-CO Transformer

Conv OutletGFCI

Pwd-CO Fuse Switch

C08128

Fig. 15 -- Convenience Outlet Location

Non--powered type: This type requires the fieldinstallation of a general--purpose 125--volt 15--A circuitpowered from a source elsewhere in the building. Observenational and local codes when selecting wire size, fuse orbreaker requirements and disconnect switch size andlocation. Route 125--v power supply conductors into thebottom of the utility box containing the duplex receptacle.

Unit--powered type: A unit--mounted transformer isfactory--installed to stepdown the main power supplyvoltage to the unit to 115--v at the duplex receptacle. Thisoption also includes a manual switch with fuse, located ina utility box and mounted on a bracket behind theconvenience outlet; access is through the unit’s controlbox access panel. See Fig. 15.

The primary leads to the convenience outlet transformerare not factory--connected. Selection of primary powersource is a customer--option. If local codes permit, thetransformer primary leads can be connected at theline--side terminals on a unit--mounted non--fuseddisconnect or HACR breaker switch; this will provideservice power to the unit when the unit disconnect switchor HACR switch is open. Other connection methods willresult in the convenience outlet circuit being de--energizedwhen the unit disconnect or HACR switch is open. SeeFig. 16.

CO8283

Fig. 16 -- Powered Convenience Outlet Wiring

UNITVOLTAGE

CONNECTAS

PRIMARYCONNECTIONS

TRANSFORMERTERMINALS

208,230 240 L1: RED +YEL

L2: BLU + GRAH1 + H3H2 + H4

460 480L1: REDSplice BLU + YELL2: GRA

H1H2 + H3H4

575 600 L1: REDL2: GRA

H1H2

Duty Cycle: The unit--powered convenience outlet has aduty cycle limitation. The transformer is intended toprovide power on an intermittent basis for service tools,lamps, etc; it is not intended to provide 15--amps loadingfor continuous duty loads (such as electric heaters forovernight use). Observe a 50% limit on circuit loadingabove 8--amps (i.e., limit loads exceeding 8--amps to 30minutes of operation every hour).

Maintenance: Periodically test the GFCI receptacle bypressing the TEST button on the face of the receptacle.This should cause the internal circuit of the receptacle totrip and open the receptacle. Check for proper groundingwires and power line phasing if the GFCI receptacle doesnot trip as required. Press the RESET button to clear thetripped condition.

Fuse on powered type: The factory fuse is a Bussman“Fusetron” T--15, non--renewable screw--in (Edison base)type plug fuse.

Using unit--mounted convenience outlets: Units withunit--mounted convenience outlet circuits will oftenrequire that two disconnects be opened to de--energize allpower to the unit. Treat all units as electrically energizeduntil the convenience outlet power is also checked andde--energization is confirmed. Observe National ElectricalCode Article 210, Branch Circuits, for use of convenienceoutlets.

SMOKE DETECTORSSmoke detectors are available as factory--installed optionson 48HC models. Smoke detectors may be specified forSupply Air only or for Return Air without or witheconomizer or in combination of Supply Air and ReturnAir. Return Air smoke detectors are arranged for verticalreturn configurations only. All components necessary foroperation are factory--provided and mounted. The unit isfactory--configured for immediate smoke detectorshutdown operation; additional wiring or modifications tounit terminal board may be necessary to complete the unitand smoke detector configuration to meet projectrequirements.

System

The smoke detector system consists of a four--wirecontroller and one or two sensors. Its primary function isto shut down the rooftop unit in order to prevent smokefrom circulating throughout the building. It is not to beused as a life saving device.

48HC

Page 16: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

16

Controller

The controller (see Fig. 17) includes a controller housing,a printed circuit board, and a clear plastic cover. Thecontroller can be connected to one or two compatible ductsmoke sensors. The clear plastic cover is secured to thehousing with a single captive screw for easy access to thewiring terminals. The controller has three LEDs (forPower, Trouble and Alarm) and a manual test/reset button(on the cover face).

Duct smoke sensorcontroller

Fastener(2X)

Controller cover

Conduit nuts(supplied by installer)

Conduit support plate

Cover gasket(ordering option)

Conduit couplings(supplied by installer)

Terminal block cover

Controller housingand electronics

Alarm Power

Test/resetswitch

Trouble

C08208

Fig. 17 -- Controller Assembly

Sensor

The sensor (see Fig. 18) includes a plastic housing, aprinted circuit board, a clear plastic cover, a samplingtube inlet and an exhaust tube. The sampling tube (whenused) and exhaust tube are attached during installation.The sampling tube varies in length depending on the sizeof the rooftop unit. The clear plastic cover permits visualinspections without having to disassemble the sensor. Thecover attaches to the sensor housing using four captivescrews and forms an airtight chamber around the sensingelectronics. Each sensor includes a harness with an RJ45terminal for connecting to the controller. Each sensor hasfour LEDs (for Power, Trouble, Alarm and Dirty) and amanual test/reset button (on the left--side of the housing).

Air is introduced to the duct smoke detector sensor’ssensing chamber through a sampling tube that extends intothe HVAC duct and is directed back into the ventilationsystem through a (shorter) exhaust tube.

The difference in air pressure between the two tubes pullsthe sampled air through the sensing chamber. When asufficient amount of smoke is detected in the sensingchamber, the sensor signals an alarm state and thecontroller automatically takes the appropriate action toshut down fans and blowers, change over air handlingsystems, notify the fire alarm control panel, etc.

The sensor uses a process called differential sensing toprevent gradual environmental changes from triggeringfalse alarms. A rapid change in environmental conditions,such as smoke from a fire, causes the sensor to signal analarm state but dust and debris accumulated over timedoes not.

Duct smoke sensor

SeeDetail A

Exhaust tube

Plug

Sampling tube(ordered separately)

Intakegasket

Cover gasket(ordering option)

TSD-CO2(ordering option)

Sensor housingand electronics

Exhaust gasket

Coupling

Sensor cover

Detail A

Magnetictest/reset

switch

Alarm

Trouble

Power

Dirty

C08209

Fig. 18 -- Smoke Detector Sensor

For installations using two sensors, the duct smokedetector does not differentiate which sensor signals analarm or trouble condition.

Smoke Detector Locations

Supply Air — The Supply Air smoke detector sensor islocated to the left of the unit’s indoor (supply) fan. SeeFig. 19. Access is through the fan access panel. There isno sampling tube used at this location. The sampling tubeinlet extends through the side plate of the fan housing(into a high pressure area). The controller is located on abracket to the right of the return filter, accessed throughthe lift--off filter panel.

48HC

Page 17: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

17

Smoke Detector Sensor

C08245

Fig. 19 -- Typical Supply Air Smoke Detector SensorLocation

Return Air without Economizer — The sampling tube islocated across the return air opening on the unit basepan.See Fig. 20. The holes in the sampling tube facedownward, into the return air stream. The sampling tube isconnected via tubing to the return air sensor that ismounted on a bracket high on the partition between returnfilter and controller location. (This sensor is shipped in aflat--mounting location. Installation requires that thissensor be relocated to its operating location and the tubingto the sampling tube be connected. See installation stepsbelow.)

Return Air Detector Sampling Tube

Controller module

Return Air Detector module(shipping position shown)*

*RA detector must be moved from shipping position to operating position by installer

C07307

Fig. 20 -- Typical Return Air Detector Location

Return Air with Economizer — The sampling tube isinserted through the side plates of the economizerhousing, placing it across the return air opening on theunit basepan. See Fig. 21. The holes in the sampling tubeface downward, into the return air stream. The samplingtube is connected via tubing to the return air sensor that ismounted on a bracket high on the partition between returnfilter and controller location. (This sensor is shipped in aflat--mounting location. Installation requires that thissensor be relocated to its operating location and the tubingto the sampling tube be connected. See installation stepsbelow.)

Return AirSampling Tube

C08129

Fig. 21 -- Return Air Sampling Tube Location

Completing Installation of Return Air SmokeSensor:

FlexibleExhaust Tubes

Screws

Sample Tube

C08126

Fig. 22 -- Return Air Detector Shipping Position

1. Unscrew the two screws holding the Return AirSensor detector plate. See Fig. 22. Save the screws.

2. Remove the Return Air Sensor and its detector plate.3. Rotate the detector plate so the sensor is facing out-wards and the sampling tube connection is on the bot-tom. See Fig. 23.

4. Screw the sensor and detector plate into its operatingposition using screws from Step 1. Make sure thesampling tube connection is on the bottom and the ex-haust tube is on the top. See Fig. 24.

5. Connect the flexible tube on the sampling inlet to thesampling tube on the basepan.

6. For units with an economizer, the sampling tube is in-tegrated into the economizer housing but the connec-tion of the flexible tubing to the sampling tube is thesame.

C08127

Fig. 23 -- Return Air Sensor Operating Position

48HC

Page 18: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

18

FIOP Smoke Detector Wiring and Response

All units: FIOP smoke detector is configured toautomatically shut down all unit operations when smokecondition is detected. See Fig. 24, Smoke DetectorWiring.

Highlight A: JMP 3 is factory--cut, transferring unitcontrol to smoke detector.

Highlight B: Smoke detector NC contact set will open onsmoke alarm condition, de--energizing the ORNconductor.

A

E

F

CD

B

C08246

Fig. 24 -- Typical Smoke Detector System Wiring

Highlight C: 24--v power signal via ORN lead is removedat Smoke Detector input on LCTB; all unit operationscease immediately.

PremierLink™ and RTU--MP Controls: Unit operatingfunctions (fan, cooling and heating) are terminated asdescribed above. In addition:

Highlight D: On smoke alarm condition, the smokedetector NO Alarm contact will close, supplying 24--vpower to GRA conductor.

Highlight E: GRA lead at Smoke Alarm input on LCTBprovides 24--v signal to FIOP DDC control.

Premier--Link: This signal is conveyed to PremierLinkFIOP’s TB1 at terminal TB1--6 (BLU lead). This signalinitiates the FSD sequence by the PremierLink control.FSD status is reported to connected CCN network.

RTU--MP: The 24--v signal is conveyed to RTU--MP’sJ1--10 input terminal. This signal initiates the FSD

sequence by the RTU--MP control. FSD status is reportedto connected BAS network.

Using Remote Logic: Five conductors are provided forfield use (see Highlight F) for additional annunciationfunctions.

Additional Application Data — Refer to Catalog No.HKRNKA--1XA for discussions on additional controlfeatures of these smoke detectors including multiple unitcoordination. See Fig. 24.

Sensor and Controller Tests

Sensor Alarm Test

The sensor alarm test checks a sensor’s ability to signal analarm state. This test requires that you use a field providedSD--MAG test magnet.

48HC

Page 19: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

19

OPERATIONAL TEST HAZARDFailure to follow this caution may result in personneland authority concern.

This test places the duct detector into the alarm state.Unless part of the test, disconnect all auxiliaryequipment from the controller before performing thetest. If the duct detector is connected to a fire alarmsystem, notify the proper authorities beforeperforming the test.

CAUTION!

Sensor Alarm Test Procedure

1. Hold the test magnet where indicated on the side ofthe sensor housing for seven seconds.

2. Verify that the sensor’s Alarm LED turns on.3. Reset the sensor by holding the test magnet againstthe sensor housing for two seconds.

4. Verify that the sensor’s Alarm LED turns off.

Controller Alarm Test

The controller alarm test checks the controller’s ability toinitiate and indicate an alarm state.

OPERATIONAL TEST HAZARDFailure to follow this caution may result in personneland authority concern.

This test places the duct detector into the alarm state.Disconnect all auxiliary equipment from the controllerbefore performing the test. If the duct detector isconnected to a fire alarm system, notify the properauthorities before performing the test.

CAUTION!

Controller Alarm Test Procedure

1. Press the controller’s test/reset switch for sevenseconds.

2. Verify that the controller’s Alarm LED turns on.3. Reset the sensor by pressing the test/reset switch fortwo seconds.

4. Verify that the controller’s Alarm LED turns off.

Dirty Controller Test

The dirty controller test checks the controller’s ability toinitiate a dirty sensor test and indicate its results.

OPERATIONAL TEST HAZARDFailure to follow this caution may result in personneland authority concern.

Pressing the controller’s test/reset switch for longerthan seven seconds will put the duct detector into thealarm state and activate all automatic alarm responses.

CAUTION!

Dirty Controller Test Procedure

1. Press the controller’s test/reset switch for twoseconds.

2. Verify that the controller’s Trouble LED flashes.

Dirty Sensor Test

The dirty sensor test provides an indication of the sensor’sability to compensate for gradual environmental changes.A sensor that can no longer compensate for environmentalchanges is considered 100% dirty and requires cleaning orreplacing. You must use a field provided SD--MAG testmagnet to initiate a sensor dirty test. The sensor’s DirtyLED indicates the results of the dirty test as shown inTable 2.

OPERATIONAL TEST HAZARDFailure to follow this caution may result in personneland authority concern.

Holding the test magnet against the sensor housing formore than seven seconds will put the duct detectorinto the alarm state and activate all automatic alarmresponses.

CAUTION!

Table 2 – Dirty LED Test

FLASHES DESCRIPTION1 0---25% dirty. (Typical of a newly installed detector)2 25---50% dirty3 51---75% dirty4 76---99% dirty

Dirty Sensor Test Procedure

1. Hold the test magnet where indicated on the side ofthe sensor housing for two seconds.

2. Verify that the sensor’s Dirty LED flashes.

48HC

Page 20: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

20

OPERATIONAL TEST HAZARDFailure to follow this caution may result in personneland authority concern.

Changing the dirty sensor test operation will put thedetector into the alarm state and activate all automaticalarm responses. Before changing dirty sensor testoperation, disconnect all auxiliary equipment from thecontroller and notify the proper authorities ifconnected to a fire alarm system.

CAUTION!

Changing the Dirt Sensor Test

By default, sensor dirty test results are indicated by:S The sensor’s Dirty LED flashing.S The controller’s Trouble LED flashing.S The controller’s supervision relay contacts toggle.

The operation of a sensor’s dirty test can be changed sothat the controller’s supervision relay is not used toindicate test results. When two detectors are connected toa controller, sensor dirty test operation on both sensorsmust be configured to operate in the same manner.

To Configure the Dirty Sensor Test Operation

1. Hold the test magnet where indicated on the side ofthe sensor housing until the sensor’s Alarm LED turnson and its Dirty LED flashes twice (approximately 60seconds).

2. Reset the sensor by removing the test magnet thenholding it against the sensor housing again until thesensor’s Alarm LED turns off (approximately 2seconds).

Remote Station Test

The remote station alarm test checks a test/reset station’sability to initiate and indicate an alarm state.

OPERATIONAL TEST HAZARDFailure to follow this caution may result in personneland authority concern.

This test places the duct detector into the alarm state.Unless part of the test, disconnect all auxiliaryequipment from the controller before performing thetest. If the duct detector is connected to a fire alarmsystem, notify the proper authorities beforeperforming the test.

CAUTION!

SD--TRK4 Remote Alarm Test Procedure

1. Turn the key switch to the RESET/TEST position forseven seconds.

2. Verify that the test/reset station’s Alarm LED turnson.

3. Reset the sensor by turning the key switch to theRESET/TEST position for two seconds.

4. Verify that the test/reset station’s Alarm LED turnsoff.

Remote Test/Reset Station Dirty Sensor Test

The test/reset station dirty sensor test checks the test/resetstation’s ability to initiate a sensor dirty test and indicatethe results. It must be wired to the controller as shown inFig. 25 and configured to operate the controller’ssupervision relay. For more information, see “Changingsensor dirty test operation.”

1

12

14

13

19

15

2

20

3

Reset/Test

Trouble

Power

Alarm

Supervision relaycontacts [3]

5

4

1

3

2

SD-TRK4

2

1

TB3

18 Vdc ( )+

18 Vdc ( )−

Auxiliaryequipment+

Wire must beadded by installer

Smoke Detector Controller

C08247

Fig. 25 -- Remote Test/Reset Station Connections

OPERATIONAL TEST HAZARDFailure to follow this caution may result in personneland authority concern.

If the test/reset station’s key switch is left in theRESET/TEST position for longer than seven seconds,the detector will automatically go into the alarm stateand activate all automatic alarm responses.

CAUTION!

OPERATIONAL TEST HAZARDFailure to follow this caution may result in personneland authority concern.

Holding the test magnet to the target area for longerthan seven seconds will put the detector into the alarmstate and activate all automatic alarm responses.

CAUTION!

48HC

Page 21: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

21

Dirty Sensor Test Using an SD--TRK4

1. Turn the key switch to the RESET/TEST position fortwo seconds.

2. Verify that the test/reset station’s Trouble LEDflashes.

Detector Cleaning

Cleaning the Smoke Detector

Clean the duct smoke sensor when the Dirty LED isflashing continuously or sooner if conditions warrant.

OPERATIONAL TEST HAZARDFailure to follow this caution may result in personneland authority concern.

If the smoke detector is connected to a fire alarmsystem, first notify the proper authorities that thedetector is undergoing maintenance then disable therelevant circuit to avoid generating a false alarm.

CAUTION!

1. Disconnect power from the duct detector then removethe sensor’s cover. (See Fig. 26.)

Airflow

HVAC ductSamplingtube

Retainerclip

Opticplate

Optichousing

Sensor housing

C07305

Fig. 26 -- Sensor Cleaning Diagram

2. Using a vacuum cleaner, clean compressed air, or asoft bristle brush, remove loose dirt and debris frominside the sensor housing and cover.Use isopropyl alcohol and a lint--free cloth to removedirt and other contaminants from the gasket on thesensor’s cover.

3. Squeeze the retainer clips on both sides of the optichousing then lift the housing away from the printedcircuit board.

4. Gently remove dirt and debris from around the opticplate and inside the optic housing.

5. Replace the optic housing and sensor cover.6. Connect power to the duct detector then perform asensor alarm test.

Indicators

Normal State

The smoke detector operates in the normal state in theabsence of any trouble conditions and when its sensingchamber is free of smoke. In the normal state, the PowerLED on both the sensor and the controller are on and allother LEDs are off.

Alarm State

The smoke detector enters the alarm state when theamount of smoke particulate in the sensor’s sensingchamber exceeds the alarm threshold value. (See Table 3.)Upon entering the alarm state:S The sensor’s Alarm LED and the controller’s AlarmLED turn on.

S The contacts on the controller’s two auxiliary relaysswitch positions.

S The contacts on the controller’s alarm initiation relayclose.

S The controller’s remote alarm LED output is activated(turned on).

S The controller’s high impedance multiple fan shutdowncontrol line is pulled to ground Trouble state.

The SuperDuct duct smoke detector enters the troublestate under the following conditions:S A sensor’s cover is removed and 20 minutes pass beforeit is properly secured.

S A sensor’s environmental compensation limit is reached(100% dirty).

S A wiring fault between a sensor and the controller isdetected.

An internal sensor fault is detected upon entering thetrouble state:S The contacts on the controller’s supervisory relayswitch positions. (See Fig. 27.)

S If a sensor trouble, the sensor’s Trouble LED thecontroller’s Trouble LED turn on.

S If 100% dirty, the sensor’s Dirty LED turns on and thecontroller’s Trouble LED flashes continuously.

S If a wiring fault between a sensor and the controller, thecontroller’s Trouble LED turns on but not the sensor’s.

48HC

Page 22: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

22

Alarm Power

Test/resetswitch

Trouble

C07298

Fig. 27 -- Controller Assembly

NOTE: All troubles are latched by the duct smokedetector. The trouble condition must be cleared and thenthe duct smoke detector must be reset in order to restore itto the normal state.

Resetting Alarm and Trouble Condition Trips:

Manual reset is required to restore smoke detector systemsto Normal operation. For installations using two sensors,the duct smoke detector does not differentiate whichsensor signals an alarm or trouble condition. Check eachsensor for Alarm or Trouble status (indicated by LED).Clear the condition that has generated the trip at thissensor. Then reset the sensor by pressing and holding thereset button (on the side) for 2 seconds. Verify that thesensor’s Alarm and Trouble LEDs are now off. At thecontroller, clear its Alarm or Trouble state by pressing andholding the manual reset button (on the front cover) for 2seconds. Verify that the controller’s Alarm and TroubleLEDs are now off. Replace all panels.

Troubleshooting

Controller’s Trouble LED is On

1. Check the Trouble LED on each sensor connected tothe controller. If a sensor’s Trouble LED is on, de-termine the cause and make the necessary repairs.

2. Check the wiring between the sensor and the control-ler. If wiring is loose or missing, repair or replace asrequired.

Controller’s Trouble LED is Flashing

1. One or both of the sensors is 100% dirty.2. Determine which Dirty LED is flashing then cleanthat sensor assembly as described in the detectorcleaning section.

Sensor’s Trouble LED is On

1. Check the sensor’s Dirty LED. If it is flashing, thesensor is dirty and must be cleaned.

2. Check the sensor’s cover. If it is loose or missing, se-cure the cover to the sensor housing.

3. Replace sensor assembly.

Sensor’s Power LED is Off

1. Check the controller’s Power LED. If it is off, de-termine why the controller does not have power andmake the necessary repairs.

2. Check the wiring between the sensor and the control-ler. If wiring is loose or missing, repair or replace asrequired.

Table 3 – Detector Indicators

CONTROL OR INDICATOR DESCRIPTION

Magnetic test/reset switch Resets the sensor when it is in the alarm or trouble state. Activates or tests the sensor when it is inthe normal state.

Alarm LED Indicates the sensor is in the alarm state.Trouble LED Indicates the sensor is in the trouble state.

Dirty LED Indicates the amount of environmental compensation used by the sensor(flashing continuously = 100%)

Power LED Indicates the sensor is energized.

48HC

Page 23: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

23

Controller’s Power LED is Off

1. Make sure the circuit supplying power to the control-ler is operational. If not, make sure JP2 and JP3 areset correctly on the controller before applying power.

2. Verify that power is applied to the controller’s supplyinput terminals. If power is not present, replace or re-pair wiring as required.

Remote Test/Reset Station’s Trouble LED DoesNot flash When Performing a Dirty Test, But theController’s Trouble LED Does

1. Verify that the remote test/station is wired as shownin Fig. 25. Repair or replace loose or missing wiring.

2. Configure the sensor dirty test to activate the control-ler’s supervision relay. See “Changing sensor dirtytest operation.”

Sensor’s Trouble LED is On, But the Controller’sTrouble LED is OFF

Remove JP1 on the controller.

PROTECTIVE DEVICES

Compressor Protection

Overcurrent

The compressor has internal linebreak motor protection.

Overtemperature

The compressor has an internal protector to protect itagainst excessively high discharge gas temperatures.

High Pressure Switch

The system is provided with a high pressure switchmounted on the discharge line. The switch isstem--mounted and brazed into the discharge tube. Tripsetting is 630 psig +/-- 10 psig (4344 +/-- 69 kPa) whenhot. Reset is automatic at 505 psig (3482 kPa).

Low Pressure Switch

The system is protected against a loss of charge and lowevaporator coil loading condition by a low pressure switchlocated on the suction line near the compressor. Theswitch is stem--mounted. Trip setting is 54 psig +/-- 5 psig(372 +/-- 34 kPa). Reset is automatic at 117 +/-- 5 psig(807 +/-- 34 kPa).

Evaporator Freeze Protection

The system is protected against evaporator coil frostingand low temperature conditions by a temperature switchmounted on the evaporator coil hairpin. Trip setting is30_F +/-- 5_F (--1_C +/-- 3_C). Reset is automatic at 45_F(7_C).

Supply (Indoor) Fan Motor Protection

Disconnect and lockout power when servicing fan motor.

The standard supply fan motor is equipped with internalovercurrent and overtemperature protection. Protectiondevices reset automatically.

The High Static option supply fan motor is equipped witha pilot--circuit Thermix combination overtemperature/overcurrent protection device. This device resetsautomatically. Do not bypass this switch to correcttrouble. Determine the cause and correct it.

Condenser Fan Motor Protection

The condenser fan motor is internally protected againstovertemperature.

Relief Device

A soft solder joint at the suction service access portprovides pressure relief under abnormal temperature andpressure conditions (i.e., fire in building). Protect thisjoint during brazing operations near this joint.

Control Circuit, 24--V

The control circuit is protected against overcurrentconditions by a circuit breaker mounted on controltransformer TRAN. Reset is manual.

GAS HEATING SYSTEM

General

The heat exchanger system consists of a gas valve feedingmultiple inshot burners off a manifold. The burners fireinto matching primary tubes. The primary tubes dischargeinto combustion plenum where gas flow converges intosecondary tubes. The secondary tubes exit into theinduced draft fan wheel inlet. The induced fan wheeldischarges into a flue passage and flue gases exit out aflue hood on the side of the unit. The induced draft fanmotor includes a Hall Effect sensor circuit that confirmsadequate wheel speed via the Integrated Gas Control(IGC) board. Safety switches include a Rollout Switch (atthe top of the burner compartment) and a limit switch(mounted through the fan deck, over the tubes). (See Fig.28 and Fig. 29.)

48HC

Page 24: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

24

INDUCED-DRAFTMOTORMOUNTINGPLATE

INDUCED-DRAFTMOTOR

MANIFOLDPRESSURETAP

VESTIBULEPLATE

FLUEEXHAUST

ROLLOUTSWITCH

BLOWERHOUSING

GASVALVE

BURNERSECTION

C06152

Fig. 28 -- Burner Section Details

Limit Switch and Shield

C08284

Fig. 29 -- Limit Switch Location

Fuel Types and Pressures

Natural Gas — The 48HC unit is factory--equipped for usewith Natural Gas fuel at elevation under 2000 ft (610 m).See section Orifice Replacement for information inmodifying this unit for installation at elevations above2000 ft (610 m).

Gas line pressure entering the unit’s main gas valve mustbe within specified ranges. Adjust unit gas regulator valveas required or consult local gas utility.

Table 4 – Natural Gas Supply Line Pressure Ranges

UNIT MODEL UNIT SIZE MIN MAX

48HC All 4.0 in. wg(996 Pa)

13.0 in. wg(3240 Pa)

Manifold pressure is factory--adjusted for NG fuel use.Adjust as required to obtain best flame characteristic.

Table 5 – Natural Gas Manifold Pressure Ranges

UNITMODEL

UNITSIZE

HIGHFIRE

LOWFIRE RANGE

48HCD,S48HCE,R48HCF,T

All 3.5 in. wg(872 Pa)

1.7 in. wg(423 Pa){

2.0---5.0 in. wg (Hi)(498---1245 Pa)

48HCL48HCM48HCN

All 3.5 in. wg(872 Pa) NA 2.0---5.0 in. wg (Hi)

(498---1245 Pa)

NA: Not Available{ 3 Phase models only

Liquid Propane — Accessory packages are available forfield--installation that will convert the 48HC unit (exceptlow NOx model) to operate with Liquid Propane (LP)fuels. These kits include new orifice spuds, new springsfor gas valves and a supply line low pressure switch. Seesection on Orifice Replacement for details on orifice sizeselections.

Low NOx models include specially--sized orifices and useof different flue flow limits and tube baffles. Because ofthese extra features, conversion of these models to LP isnot recommended.

Fuel line pressure entering unit gas valve must remainwithin specified range.

Table 6 – Liquid Propane Supply Line Pressure Ranges

UNIT MODEL UNIT SIZE MIN MAX48HCD,E,F48HCS,R,T All 11.0 in. wg

(2740 Pa)13.0 in. wg(3240 Pa)

48HCL,M,N All NA NA

Manifold pressure for LP fuel use must be adjusted tospecified range. Follow instructions in the accessory kit tomake initial readjustment.

Table 7 – Liquid Propane Manifold Pressure Ranges

UNIT MODEL UNIT SIZE HIGH FIRE LOW FIRE48HCD,S48HCE,R48HCF,T

All 10.0 in. wg(2490 Pa)

5.0 in. wg(1245 Pa){

48HCL,48HCM,48HCN

All NA NA

NA: Not Available{ 3 Phase models only

Supply Pressure Switch — The LP conversion kit includesa supply low pressure switch. The switch contacts (fromterminal C to terminal NO) will open the gas valve powerwhenever the supply line pressure drops below thesetpoint. See Fig. 30 and Fig. 31. If the low pressureremains open for 15 minutes during a call for heat, theIGC circuit will initiate a Ignition Fault (5 flashes)lockout. Reset of the low pressure switch is automatic onrise in supply line pressure. Reset of the IGC requires arecycle of unit power after the low pressure switch hasclosed.

C08238

Fig. 30 -- LP Low Pressure Switch (Installed)

48HC

Page 25: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

25

PNKW2TSTAT

GRA

BRN

IGC

J2-12

IGC

J2-11BRNC NO

MGVC

LP LPS

C08285

Fig. 31 -- LP Supply Line Low Pressure Switch Wiring

This switch also prevents operation when the propane tanklevel is low which can result in gas with a highconcentration of impurities, additives, and residues thathave settled to the bottom of the tank. Operation underthese conditions can cause harm to the heat exchangersystem. Contact your fuel supplier if this condition issuspected.

Flue Gas Passageways

To inspect the flue collector box and upper areas of theheat exchanger:

1. Remove the combustion blower wheel and motor as-sembly according to directions in Combustion--AirBlower section. See Fig. 32.

2. Remove the flue cover to inspect the heat exchanger.3. Clean all surfaces as required using a wire brush.

Combustion--Air Blower

Clean periodically to assure proper airflow and heatingefficiency. Inspect blower wheel every fall andperiodically during heating season. For the first heatingseason, inspect blower wheel bi--monthly to determineproper cleaning frequency.

To access burner section, slide the sliding burner partitionout of the unit.

To inspect blower wheel, shine a flashlight into draft hoodopening. If cleaning is required, remove motor and wheelas follows:

1. Slide burner access panel out.2. Remove the 7 screws that attach induced--draft motorhousing to vestibule plate. (See Fig. 32.)

3. The blower wheel can be cleaned at this point. If ad-ditional cleaning is required, continue with Steps 4and 5.

4. To remove blower from the motor shaft, remove 2setscrews.

5. To remove motor, remove the 4 screws that hold themotor to mounting plate. Remove the motor coolingfan by removing one setscrew. Then remove nuts thathold motor to mounting plate.

6. To reinstall, reverse the procedure outlined above.

Flue Baffle(Low NOx only)

Heater TubeAssemblySeal Strips, Sponge Rubber

RegulatorGasketRegulator

Baffle Assembly(Low NOx only)

Retainer

SupportInsulationAssembly

Wind Cap Assembly(shown inverted,as shipped)

Burner Assembly

Inducer Fan-MotorAssembly

C08227

Fig. 32 -- Heat Exchanger Assembly

48HC

Page 26: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

26

Burners and Igniters

EQUIPMENT DAMAGE HAZARDFailure to follow this caution may result inequipment damage.

When working on gas train, do not hit or plugorifice spuds.

CAUTION!

Main Burners

To access burners, remove burner access panel and slideout burner partition. At the beginning of each heatingseason, inspect for deterioration or blockage due tocorrosion or other causes. Observe the main burner flamesand adjust, if necessary.

Orifice projection — Refer to Fig. 33 for maximumprojection dimension for orifice face to manifold tube.

Orifice

1.00-in(25.4 mm)

ManifoldPipe

C08211

Fig. 33 -- Orifice Projection

Removal and Replacement of Gas Train

See Fig. 28, Fig. 32 and Fig. 34.

1. Shut off manual gas valve.2. Shut off power to unit.3. Slide out burner partition.4. Disconnect gas piping at unit gas valve.5. Remove wires connected to gas valve. Mark eachwire.

C06153

Fig. 34 -- Burner Tray Details

6. Remove igniter wires and sensor wires at the Integ-rated Gas Unit Controller (IGC). (See Fig. 35.)

7. Remove the 2 screws that attach the burner rack tothe vestibule plate (Fig. 32).

8. Slide the burner tray out of the unit (Fig. 34).9. To reinstall, reverse the procedure outlined above.

Cleaning and Adjustment

1. Remove burner rack from unit as described in Re-moval and Replacement of Gas Train section, above.

2. Inspect burners; if dirty, remove burners from rack.(Mark each burner to identify its position before re-moving from the rack.)

3. Use a soft brush to clean burners and cross--over portas required.

4. Adjust spark gap. (See Fig. 36 and Fig. 37.)5. If factory orifice has been removed, check that eachorifice is tight at its threads into the manifold pipeand that orifice projection does not exceed maximumvalve. See Fig. 33.

6. Reinstall burners on rack in the same locations asfactory--installed. (The outside crossover flame re-gions of the outermost burners are pinched off to pre-vent excessive gas flow from the side of the burnerassembly. If the pinched crossovers are installedbetween two burners, the flame will not ignite prop-erly.)

RACEWAYINTEGRATED GAS UNITCONTROLLER (IGC)

HOLE IN END PANEL (HIDDEN)

C08454

Fig. 35 -- Unit Control Box/IGC Location

7. Reinstall burner rack as described in Removal andReplacement of Gas Train section, above.

Gas Valve — All three--phase models (except Low NOx)are equipped with 2--stage gas valves. Single--phasemodels and all Low NOx models are equipped withsingle--stage gas valves. See Fig. 38 for locations ofadjustment screws and features on the gas valves.

48HC

Page 27: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

27

To adjust gas valve pressure settings:

IMPORTANT: Leak check all gas connections includingthe main service connection, gas valve, gas spuds, andmanifold pipe plug. All leaks must be repaired beforefiring unit.

Check Unit Operation and Make NecessaryAdjustments

NOTE: Gas supply pressure at gas valve inlet must bewithin specified ranges for fuel type and unit size. SeeTable 4 and Table 5.1. Remove manifold pressure tap plug from manifoldand connect pressure gauge or manometer. (See Fig.34.)

2. Turn on electrical supply.3. Turn on unit main gas valve.4. Set room thermostat to call for heat. If unit has two--stage gas valve, verify high--stage heat operation be-fore attempting to adjust manifold pressure.

5. When main burners ignite, check all fittings, mani-fold, and orifices for leaks.

6. Adjust high--stage pressure to specified setting byturning the plastic adjustment screw clockwise to in-crease pressure, counter--clockwise to decrease pres-sure.

7. For Two--Stage Gas Valves set room thermostat tocall for low--stage heat. Adjust low--stage pressure tospecified setting.

8. Replace regulator cover screw(s) when finished.

9. With burner access panel removed, observe unit heat-ing operation in both high stage and low stage opera-tion if so equipped. Observe burner flames to see ifthey are blue in appearance, and that the flames areapproximately the same for each burner.

10. Turn off unit, remove pressure manometer and re-place the 1/8 in. pipe fitting on the gas manifold. (SeeFig. 33.)

Limit Switch

Remove blower access panel. Limit switch is located onthe fan deck. See Fig. 29.

Burner Ignition

Unit is equipped with a direct spark ignition 100% lockoutsystem. Integrated Gas Unit Controller (IGC) is located inthe control box. See Fig. 35. The IGC contains aself--diagnostic LED (light--emitting diode). A single LED(see Fig. 39) on the IGC provides a visual display ofoperational or sequential problems when the power supplyis uninterrupted. When a break in power occurs, the IGCwill be reset (resulting in a loss of fault history) and theindoor (evaporator) fan ON/OFF times will be reset. TheLED error code can be observed through the viewport.During servicing refer to the label on the control boxcover or Table 8 for an explanation of LED error codedescriptions.

If lockout occurs, unit may be reset by interrupting powersupply to unit for at least 5 seconds.

72,000 BTUH INPUT AND 60,000 BTUH INPUT

115,000 BTUH INPUT, 150,000 BTUH INPUT, 90,000BTUH INPUT AND 120,000 BTUH INPUT

LOW HEAT

MEDIUM AND HIGH HEAT

C06154

Fig. 36 -- Spark Adjustment (04--07)

48HC

Page 28: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

28

125,000/90,000 BTUH INPUT

180,000/120,000 BTUH INPUT

240,000/180,000 BTUH INPUT 250,000/200,000 BTUH INPUT

C08447

Fig. 37 -- Spark Adjustment (08--09)

Table 8 – LED Error Code Description*

LED INDICATION ERROR CODEDESCRIPTION

ON Normal OperationOFF Hardware Failure1 Flash{ Evaporator Fan On/Off Delay Modified2 Flashes Limit Switch Fault3 Flashes Flame Sense Fault4 Flashes 4 Consecutive Limit Switch Faults5 Flashes Ignition Lockout Fault6 Flashes Induced---Draft Motor Fault7 Flashes Rollout Switch Fault8 Flashes Internal Control Fault9 Flashes Software Lockout

LEGENDLED --- Light Emitting Diode* A 3---second pause exists between LED error codeflashes. If more than one error code exists, all applicablecodes will be displayed in numerical sequence.

{ Indicates a code that is not an error. The unit will continueto operate when this code is displayed.

IMPORTANT: Refer to Troubleshooting Table 13 andTable 14 for additional information.

Orifice Replacement

This unit uses orifice type LH32RFnnn (where nnnindicates orifice reference size). When replacing unitorifices, order the necessary parts via Carrier RCD. SeeTable 10 for available orifice sizes. See Table 11 andTable 12 for orifice sizes for Natural Gas and LP fuelusage at various elevations above sea level.

Check that each replacement orifice is tight at its threadsinto the manifold pipe and that orifice projection does notexceed maximum value. See Fig. 33.

48HC

Page 29: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

29

Single Stage 2 StageC08210

Fig. 38 -- Gas Valves

Red LED-Status

C08452

Fig. 39 -- Integrated Gas Control (IGC) Board

48HC

Page 30: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

30

Table 9 – IGC Connections

TERMINAL LABEL POINT DESCRIPTION SENSOR LOCATION TYPE OF I/O CONNECTIONPIN NUMBER

INPUTSRT, C Input power from TRAN 1 control box 24 VAC —SS Speed sensor gas section analog input J1, 1-3FS, T1 Flame sensor gas section switch input —W Heat stage 1 LCTB 24 VAC J2, 2RS Rollout switch gas section switch input J2, 5-6LS Limit switch fan section switch input J2, 7-8CS Centrifugal switch (not used) — switch input J2, 9-10

OUTPUTSL1, CM Induced draft combustion motor gas section line VACIFO Indoor fan control box relay J2, 1GV Gas valve (heat stage 1) gas section relay J2, 11-12

Table 10 – Orifice Sizes

ORIFICEDRILL SIZE

CARRIERPART NUMBER

DRILLDIA. (in.)

#30 LH32RF129 0.12851/8 LH32RF125 0.1250#31 LH32RF120 0.1200#32 LH32RF116 0.1160#33 LH32RF113 0.1130#34 LH32RF111 0.1110#35 LH32RF110 0.1100#36 LH32RF105 0.1065#37 LH32RF104 0.1040#38 LH32RF102 0.1015#39 LH32RF103 0.0995#40 LH32RF098 0.0980#41 LH32RF096 0.0960#42 LH32RF094 0.0935#43 LH32RF089 0.0890#44 LH32RF086 0.0860#45 LH32RF082 0.0820#46 LH32RF080 0.0810#47 LH32RF079 0.0785#48 LH32RF076 0.0760#49 LH32RF073 0.0730#50 LH32RF070 0.0700#51 LH32RF067 0.0670#52 LH32RF065 0.0635#53 LH32RF060 0.0595#54 LH32RF055 0.0550#55 LH32RF052 0.0520#56 LH32RF047 0.0465#57 LH32RF043 0.0430#58 LH32RF042 0.0420

48HC

Page 31: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

31

Table 11 – Altitude Compensation* (A04--A07)

ELEVATIONft (m)

72,000 BTUHNominal

115,000 BTUHNominal

150,000 BTUHNominal

NGOrifice Size

LPOrifice Size

NGOrifice Size

LPOrifice Size

NGOrifice Size

LPOrifice Size

0 --- 2000 (610) 331 514 331 503 †30 4632000 (610) 351 514 351 514 †30 4733000 (914) 351 524 351 514 311 4734000 (1219) 361 524 361 514 311 4835000 (1524) 361 524 361 514 311 4836000 (1829) 372 524 372 524 311 4837000 (2134) 382 534 382 524 321 4938000 (2438) 392 534 392 524 331 4939000 (2743) †40 534 †40 534 341 50310000 (3048) †41 544 †41 534 351 50311000 (3353) †42 544 †42 534 361 51412000 (3658) †43 544 †43 544 372 51413000 (3962) †43 554 †43 544 382 52414000 (4267) 442 †56 442 554 †40 534

Table 11 (cont.) -- Altitude Compensation* (A08--A09)

ELEVATIONft (m)

125,000BTUH Nominal

250,000BTUH Nominal

180,000, 224,000BTUH Nominal

NG OrificeSize

LP OrificeSize

NG OrificeSize

LP OrificeSize

NG OrificeSize

LP OrificeSize

0 --- 2000 (610) 311 493 †30 463 311 4832000 (610) 321 503 †30 473 321 4933000 (914) 321 503 311 473 321 4934000 (1219) 331 503 311 483 331 4935000 (1524) 331 514 311 483 331 5036000 (1829) 341 514 311 483 341 5037000 (2134) 351 514 321 493 351 5038000 (2438) 361 524 331 493 361 5149000 (2743) 372 524 341 503 372 51410000 (3048) 382 524 351 503 382 52411000 (3353) 392 534 361 514 392 52412000 (3658) †41 534 372 514 †41 53413000 (3962) †42 544 382 524 †42 53414000 (4267) †43 544 †40 534 †43 544

LEGENDNG = Natural Gas LP = Liquid Propane* As the height above sea level increases, there is less oxy-gen per cubic ft. of air. Therefore, heat input rate shouldbe reduced at higher altitudes.

{ Not included in kit. May be purchased separately throughdealer.

1 = CRLPELEV001A002 = CRLPELEV002A003 = CRLPELEV003A004 = CRLPELEV004A00

48HC

Page 32: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

32

Table 12 – Altitude Compensation* (A04--A06) -- Low NOx Units

ELEVATIONft (m)

60,000, 90,000BTUH Nominal

120,000BTUH Nominal

NG Orifice Size LP Orifice Size NG Orifice Size LP Orifice Size0 --- 2000 (610) 382 534 321 5032000 (610) 392 544 331 5143000 (914) †40 544 341 5144000 (1219) †41 544 351 5145000 (1524) †41 544 351 5146000 (1829) †42 544 361 5247000 (2134) †42 544 361 5248000 (2438) †43 554 372 5249000 (2743) †43 554 382 53410000 (3048) 442 554 †40 53411000 (3353) 442 554 †41 53412000 (3658) 452 †56 †42 54413000 (3962) 473 †56 †43 54414000 (4267) 483 †56 †43 554

LEGENDNG = Natural Gas LP = Liquid Propane* As the height above sea level increases, there is less oxy-gen per cubic ft. of air. Therefore, heat input rate shouldbe reduced at higher altitudes.

{ Not included in kit. May be purchased separately throughdealer.

1 = CRLPELEV001A002 = CRLPELEV002A003 = CRLPELEV003A004 = CRLPELEV004A00

Minimum heating entering air temperature

When operating on first stage heating, the minimumtemperature of air entering the dimpled heat exchanger is50_F continuous and 45_F intermittent for standard heatexchangers and 40_F continuous and 35_F intermittent forstainless steel heat exchangers. To operate at lowermixed--air temperatures, a field--supplied outdoor--airthermostat must be used to initiate both stages of heatwhen the temperature is below the minimum requiredtemperature to ensure full fire operation. Wire theoutdoor--air thermostat OALT (part no. HH22AG106) inseries with the second stage gas valve. See Fig. 40. Set theoutdoor--air thermostat at 35_F for stainless steel heatexchangers or 45_F for standard heat exchangers. Thistemperature setting will bring on the second stage of heatwhenever the ambient temperature is below the thermostatsetpoint. Indoor comfort may be compromised whenheating is initiated using low entering air temperatureswith insufficient heating temperature rise.

LCTB

W2

Thermostat

TH1

TH2

W1W1

W2

OALT

C08442

Fig. 40 -- OATL Connections

Troubleshooting Heating System

Refer to Table 13 and Table 14 for additionaltroubleshooting topics.

48HC

Page 33: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

33

Table 13 – Heating Service Analysis

PROBLEM CAUSE REMEDY

Burners Will Not Ignite.

Misaligned spark electrodes. Check flame ignition and sensor electrode positioning.Adjust as needed.

No gas at main burners.

Check gas line for air, purge as necessary. After purginggas line of air, allow gas to dissipate for at least 5 minutesbefore attempting to relight unit.Check gas valve.

Water in gas line. Drain water and install drip leg to trap water.No power to furnace. Check power supply, fuses, wiring, and circuit breaker.No 24 v power supply to controlcircuit.

Check transformer. Transformers with internal overcurrentprotection require a cool down period before resetting.

Miswired or loose connections. Check all wiring and wire nut connections.Burned---out heat anticipator inthermostat. Replace thermostat.

Broken thermostat wires. Run continuity check. Replace wires, if necessary.

Inadequate Heating.

Dirty air filter. Clean or replace filter as necessary.

Gas input to unit too low.Check gas pressure at manifold. Clock gas meter for input.If too low, increase manifold pressure, or replace withcorrect orifices.

Unit undersized for application. Replace with proper unit or add additional unit.Restricted airflow. Clean filter, replace filter, or remove any restrictions.

Blower speed too low. Use high speed tap, increase fan speed, or install optionalblower, as suitable for individual units.

Limit switch cycles main burners. Check rotation of blower, thermostat heat anticipatorsettings, and temperature rise of unit. Adjust as needed.

Too much outdoor air.Adjust minimum position.Check economizer operation.

Poor FlameCharacteristics.

Incomplete combustion (lack ofcombustion air) results in:Aldehyde odors, CO, sootingflame, or floating flame.

Check all screws around flue outlets and burnercompartment. Tighten as necessary.Cracked heat exchanger.Overfired unit — reduce input, change orifices, or adjustgas line or manifold pressure.Check vent for restriction. Clean as necessary.Check orifice to burner alignment.

Burners Will Not TurnOff.

Unit is locked into Heating modefor a one minute minimum.

Wait until mandatory one---minute time period has elapsedor reset power to unit.

48HC

Page 34: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

34

Table 14 – IGC Board LED Alarm Codes

LEDFLASHCODE

DESCRIPTION ACTION TAKEN BYCONTROL RESET METHOD PROBABLE CAUSE

On Normal Operation — — —

Off Hardware Failure No gas heating. —

Loss of power to the IGC. Check 5 ampfuse on IGC, power to unit, 24V circuitbreaker, transformer, and wiring to theIGC.

2Flashes Limit Switch Fault

Gas valve and igniterOff.Indoor fan and inducerOn.

Limit switch closed,or heat call (W) Off.

High temperature limit switch is open.Check the operation of the indoor (evapo-rator) fan motor.Ensure that the supply-air temperaturerise is within the range on the unit name-plate. Check wiring and limit switch opera-tion.

3Flashes Flame Sense Fault

Indoor fan and inducerOn.

Flame sense normal.Power reset for LEDreset.

The IGC sensed a flame when the gasvalve should be closed. Check wiring,flame sensor, and gas valve operation.

4Flashes

Four Consecutive LimitSwitch Fault No gas heating.

Heat call (W) Off.Power reset for LEDreset.

4 consecutive limit switch faults within asingle call for heat. See Limit Switch Fault.

5Flashes Ignition Fault No gas heating.

Heat call (W) Off.Power reset for LEDreset.

Unit unsuccessfully attempted ignition for15 minutes. Check igniter and flame sen-sor electrode spacing, gaps, etc. Checkflame sense and igniter wiring. Check gasvalve operation and gas supply. Checkgas valve connections to IGC terminals.BRN lead must be on Pin 11.

6Flashes

Induced Draft MotorFault

If heat off: no gasheating.If heat on: gas valveOff and inducer On.

Inducer sense nor-mal, or heat call (W)Off.

Inducer sense On when heat call Off, orinducer sense Off when heat call On.Check wiring, voltage, and operation ofIGC motor. Check speed sensor wiring toIGC.

7Flashes Rollout Switch Lockout

Gas valve and igniterOff.Indoor fan and inducerOn.

Power reset.

Rollout switch has opened. Check gasvalve operation. Check induced-draftblower wheel is properly secured to motorshaft.

8Flashes Internal Control Lockout No gas heating. Power reset.

IGC has sensed internal hardware or soft-ware error. If fault is not cleared by reset-ting 24 v power, replace the IGC.

9Flashes

Temporary SoftwareLockout No gas heating. 1 hour auto reset, or

power reset.Electrical interference is disrupting theIGC software.

LEGENDIGC --- Integrated Gas Unit ControlLED --- Light---Emitting DiodeNOTES:

1. There is a 3---second pause between alarm code displays.2. If more than one alarm code exists, all applicable alarm codes will be displayed in numerical sequence.3. Alarm codes on the IGC will be lost if power to the unit is interrupted.

48HC

Page 35: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

35

C08199

Fig. 41 -- PremierLink Controller

PREMIERLINK™ CONTROLThe PremierLink controller (see Fig. 41) is compatiblewith Carrier Comfort Networkr (CCN) devices. Thiscontrol is designed to allow users the access and ability tochange factory--defined settings, thus expanding thefunction of the standard unit control board. CCN serviceaccess tools include System Pilot (TM), Touch Pilot (TM)and Service Tool. (Standard tier display tools Navigatortand Scrolling Marquee are not suitable for use with latestPremierLink controller (Version 2.x).)

The PremierLink control is factory--mounted in the 48HCunit’s main control box to the left of the LCTB. Factorywiring is completed through harnesses connected to theLCTB thermostat. Field connections are made at a16--pole terminal block (TB1) located on the bottom shelfof the unit control box in front of the PremierLinkcontroller The factory--installed PremierLink controlincludes the supply--air temperature (SAT) sensor. Theoutdoor air temperature (OAT) sensor is included in theFIOP/accessory EconoMi$er 2 package.

Refer to Fig. 41 for PremierLink connection locations.

NOTE: Refer to Form 33CS--58SI for completePremierLink configuration, operating sequences andtroubleshooting information. Have a copy of this manualavailable at unit start--up.

The PremierLink controller requires the use of a Carrierelectronic thermostat or a CCN connection for timebroadcast to initiate its internal timeclock. This isnecessary for broadcast of time of day functions(occupied/unoccupied).

NOTE: PremierLink controller is shipped in Sensormode. To be used with a thermostat, the PremierLinkcontroller must be configured to Thermostat mode. Referto PremierLink Configuration instructions for OperatingMode.

Supply Air Temperature (SAT) Sensor — OnFIOP--equipped 48HC unit, the unit is supplied with asupply--air temperature (SAT) sensor (33ZCSENSAT).This sensor is a tubular probe type, approx 6--inches (12.7mm) in length. It is a nominal 10--k ohm thermistor. SeeTable 15 for temperature--resistance characteristic.

The SAT is factory--wired. The SAT probe is wire--tied tothe supply--air opening (on the horizontal opening end) inits shipping position. Remove the sensor for installation.Re--position the sensor in the flange of the supply--airopening or in the supply air duct (as required by localcodes). Drill or punch a 1/2--in. hole in the flange or duct.Use two field--supplied, self--drilling screws to secure thesensor probe in a horizontal orientation. See Fig. 42.

SUPPLY AIR RETURN AIR

SUPPLY AIRTEMPERATURESENSOR

ROOFCURB

C08200

Fig. 42 -- Typical Mounting Location for Supply AirTemperature (SAT) Sensor on Small Rooftop Units

48HC

Page 36: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

36

C08248

Fig. 43 -- PremierLink™Wiring Schematic

48HC

Page 37: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

37

Table 15 – Thermistor Resistance vs TemperatureValues for Space Temperature Sensor, Supply AirTemperature Sensor, and Outdoor Air Temperature

Sensor

TEMP(C)

TEMP(F)

RESISTANCE(Ohms)

---40 ---40 335,651---35 ---31 242,195---30 ---22 176,683---25 ---13 130,243---20 ---4 96,974---15 5 72,895---10 14 55,298---5 23 42,3150 32 32,6515 41 25,39510 50 19,90315 59 15,71420 68 12,49425 77 10,00030 86 8,05635 95 6,53040 104 5,32545 113 4,36750 122 3,60155 131 2,98560 140 2,48765 149 2,08270 158 1,752

NOTE: The sensor must be mounted in the dischargeairstream downstream of the cooling coil and any heatingdevices. Be sure the probe tip does not come in contactwith any of the unit’s heater surfaces.

Outdoor Air Temperature (OAT) Sensor — The OAT isfactory--mounted in the EconoMi$er 2 (FIOP oraccessory). It is a nominal 10k ohm thermistor attached toan eyelet mounting ring. See Table 15 fortemperature--resistance characteristic.

EconoMi$er 2 — The PremierLink™ control is used withEconoMi$er 2 (option or accessory) for outdoor airmanagement. The damper position is controlled directlyby the PremierLink control; EconoMi$er 2 has no internallogic device.

Outdoor air management functions can be enhanced withfield--installation of these accessory control devices:

Enthalpy control (outdoor air or differential sensors)Space CO2 sensorOutdoor air CO2 sensor

Refer to Table 16 for accessory part numbers.

Field connections — Field connections for accessorysensor and input devices are made at the 16--pole terminalblock (TB1) located on the control box bottom shelf infront of the PremierLink control. Some input devices alsorequire a 24--vac signal source; connect at LCTB terminalR at “THERMOSTAT” connection strip for this signalsource. See connections figures on following pages forfield connection locations (and for continued connectionsat the PremierLink board inputs).

Table 17 provides a summary of field connections forunits equipped with Space Sensor. Table 18 provides asummary of field connections for units equipped withSpace Thermostat.

Space Sensors -- The PremierLink controller isfactory--shipped configured for Space Sensor Mode. ACarrier T--55 or T--56 space sensor must be used. T--55space temperature sensor provides a signal of spacetemperature to the PremierLink control T--56 providessame space temperature signal plus it allows foradjustment of space temperature setpoints from the face ofthe sensor by the occupants. See Table 15 for temperatureversus resistance characteristic on the space sensors.

Connect T--55 -- See Fig. 44 for typical T--55 internalconnections. Connect the T--55 SEN terminals to TB1terminals 1 and 3 (see Fig. 45).

2 3 4 5 61

SW1

SEN

BRN (GND)BLU (SPT)

RED(+)WHT(GND)

BLK(-) CCN COM

SENSOR WIRING

C08201

Fig. 44 -- T--55 Space Temperature Sensor Wiring

SEN J6-7

J6-6

1

3

TB1 PL

SEN

C08212

Fig. 45 -- PremierLink T--55 Sensor

48HC

Page 38: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

38

Table 16 – PremierLink™ Sensor Usage

APPLICATIONOUTDOOR AIRTEMPERATURESENSOR

RETURN AIRTEMPERATURESENSOR

OUTDOOR AIRENTHALPY SENSOR

RETURN AIRENTHALPY SENSOR

Differential Dry BulbTemperature withPremierLink

(PremierLink requires4---20 mA Actuator)

Included ---CRTEMPSN001A00

Required ---33ZCT55SPTor equivalent

--- ---

Single Enthalpy withPremierLink

(PremierLink requires4---20mA Actuator)

Included ---Not Used ---

Requires ---HH57AC077or equivalent

---

Differential Enthalpywith PremierLink

(PremierLink requires4---20mA Actuator)

Included ---Not Used ---

Requires ---HH57AC077or equivalent

Requires ---HH57AC078or equivalent

NOTES:CO2 Sensors (Optional):33ZCSENCO2 ---Room sensor (adjustable). Aspirator box is required for duct mounting of the sensor.

33ZCASPCO2 ---Aspirator box used for duct---mounted CO2 room sensor.

33ZCT55CO2 --- Space temperature and CO2 room sensor with override.33ZCT56CO2 --- Space temperature and CO2 room sensor with override and setpoint.

Table 17 – Space Sensor ModeTB1 TERMINAL FIELD CONNECTION INPUT SIGNAL

1 T55---SEN/T56---SEN Analog (10k thermistor)2 RMTOCC Discrete, 24VAC3 T55---SEN/T56---SEN Analog (10k thermistor)4 CMPSAFE Discrete, 24VAC5 T56---SET Analog (10k thermistor)6 FSD Discrete, 24VAC7 LOOP---PWR Analog, 24VDC8 SPS Discrete, 24VAC9 IAQ---SEN Analog, 4---20mA10 FILTER Discrete, 24VAC11 IAQ---COM/OAQ---COM/RH---COM Analog, 4---20mA12 CCN + (RED) Digital, , 5VDC13 OAQ---SEN/RH---SEN Analog, 4---20mA14 CCN Gnd (WHT) Digital, 5VDC15 AUX OUT(Power Exhaust) (Output)Discrete 24VAC16 CCN --- (BLK) Digital, 5VDC

LEGEND:T55 --- Space Temperature SensorT56 --- Space Temperature SensorCCN --- Carrier Comfort Network (communicationbus)

CMPSAFE --- Compressor SafetyFILTER --- Dirty Filter Switch

FSD --- Fire ShutdownIAQ --- Indoor Air Quality (CO2)OAQ --- Outdoor Air Quality (CO2)RH ---Relative Humidity

SFS --- Supply Fan Status

48HC

Page 39: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

39

Table 18 – Thermostat ModeTB1 TERMINAL FIELD CONNECTION INPUT SIGNAL

1 RAT SEN Analog (10k thermistor)2 G Discrete, 24VAC3 RAT SEN Analog (10k thermistor)4 Y1 Discrete, 24VAC56 Y2 Discrete, 24VAC7 LOOP---PWR Analog, 24VDC8 W1 Discrete, 24VAC9 IAQ---SEN Analog, 4---20mA10 W2 Discrete, 24VAC11 IAQ---COM/OAQ---COM/RH---COM Analog, 4---20mA12 CCN + (RED) Digital, 5VDC13 OAQ---SEN/RH---SEN Analog, 4---20mA14 CCN Gnd (WHT) Digital, 5VDC15 AUX OUT (Power Exhaust) (Output) Discrete 24VAC16 CCN --- (BLK) Digital, 5VDC

LEGEND:CCN --- Carrier Comfort Network (communication bus)G --- Thermostat FanIAQ --- Indoor Air Quality (CO2)OAQ --- Outdoor Air Quality (CO2)RAT --- Return Air Temperature

RH --- Relative HumidityW1 --- Thermostat Heat Stage 1W2 --- Thermostat Heat Stage 2Y1 --- Thermostat Cool Stage 1Y2 --- Thermostat Cool Stage 2

Connect T--56 -- See Fig. 46 for T--56 internalconnections. Install a jumper between SEN and SETterminals as illustrated. Connect T--56 terminals to TB1terminals 1, 3 and 5 (see Fig. 47).

2 3 4 5 61

SW1

SEN SET

Cool Warm

BRN (GND)BLU (SPT)

RED(+)WHT(GND)

BLK(-) CCN COM

SENSOR WIRING

JUMPERTERMINALSAS SHOWN

BLK(T56)

C08202

Fig. 46 -- T--56 Internal Connections

SEN J6-7

J6-6

1

3

TB1 PL

SEN

SET

Jumper

TB1 PL

J6-55SET

C08213

Fig. 47 -- PremierLink™ T--56 Sensor

Connect Thermostat — A 7--wire thermostat connectionrequires a 24--v power source and a common connection.Use the R and C terminals on the LCTB’s (lightcommercial terminal board) THERMOSTAT connectionstrip for these. Connect the thermostat’s Y1, Y2, W1, W2and G terminals to PremierLink TB1 as shown in Fig. 48.

G J4-12

J4-10

J4-8

Y1

Y2

2

R R

4

6

J4-6

J4-4W2

C

8

10

C

SPACETHERMOSTAT

PL

LCTBTHERMOSTAT

W1

TB1

LCTBTHERMOSTAT

C08119

Fig. 48 -- Space Thermostat Connections

If the 48HC unit has an economizer system andfree--cooling operation is required, a sensor representingReturn Air Temperature must also be connected(field--supplied and installed). This sensor may be a T--55Space Sensor (see Fig. 44) installed in the space or in thereturn duct, or it may be sensor PNO 33ZCSENSAT,installed in the return duct. Connect this sensor to TB1--1and TB1--3 per Fig. 45. Temperature--resistancecharacteristic is found in Table 15.

48HC

Page 40: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

40

Configure the unit for Thermostat Mode — Connect to theCCN bus using a CCN service tool and navigate toPremierLink™ Configuration screen for Operating Mode.Default setting is Sensor Mode (value 1). Change thevalue to 0 to reconfigure the controller for ThermostatMode.

When the PremierLink is configured for ThermostatMode, these functions are not available: Fire Shutdown(FSD), Remote Occupied (RMTOCC), Compressor Safety(CMPSAFE), Supply Fan Status (SFS), and Filter PressureSwitch (FILTER).

Economizer controls —

Outdoor Air Enthalpy Control (PNO HH57AC077) --

The enthalpy control (HH57AC077) is available as afield--installed accessory to be used with the EconoMi$er2damper system. The outdoor air enthalpy sensor is part ofthe enthalpy control. (The separate field--installedaccessory return air enthalpy sensor (HH57AC078) isrequired for differential enthalpy control. See below.)

Locate the enthalpy control in the economizer hood.Locate two GRA leads in the factory harness and connectthese leads to enthalpy control sensors 2 and 3. See Fig.49. Connect the enthalpy control power input terminals toeconomizer actuator power leads RED (connect to TR)and BLK (connect to TR1).

6

7

LCTBECON

3

2

EnthalpySwitch

GRA

GRA

Factory Wiring HarnessC08218

Fig. 49 -- Enthalpy Switch (HH57AC077) Connections

The outdoor enthalpy changeover setpoint is set at theenthalpy controller.

The enthalpy control receives the outdoor air enthalpyfrom the outdoor air enthalpy sensor and provides a drycontact switch input to the PremierLink controller. Aclosed contact indicates that outside air is preferred to thereturn air. An open contact indicates that the economizershould remain at minimum position.

Differential Enthalpy Control — Differential enthalpycontrol is provided by sensing and comparing the outsideair and return air enthalpy conditions. Install the outdoorair enthalpy control as described above. Add and install areturn air enthalpy sensor.

Return Air Enthalpy Sensor — Mount the return--airenthalpy sensor (HH57AC078) in the return--air duct. Thereturn air sensor is wired to the enthalpy controller(HH57AC077). See Fig. 50.

LED

AB

CD

TR TR1

SO

SR

23

1

+

+

BRNRED

GRAY/ORN

GRAY/RED

WIRE HARNESSIN UNIT

BLKRED

S+

(RETURN AIRENTHALPYSENSOR)

S+

(OUTDOORAIR

ENTHALPYSENSOR)

ENTHALPY CONTROLLER

NOTES:1. Remove factory-installed jumper across SR and + before connecting

wires from return air sensor.2. Switches shown in high outdoor air enthalpy state. Terminals 2 and 3

close on low outdoor air enthalpy relative to indoor air enthalpy.3. Remove sensor mounted on back of control and locate in outside air-

stream.

C06019

Fig. 50 -- Outside and Return Air Enthalpy SensorWiring

To wire the return air enthalpy sensor, perform thefollowing:

1. Use a 2--conductor, 18 or 20 AWG, twisted pair cableto connect the return air enthalpy sensor to the enthal-py controller.

2. At the enthalpy control remove the factory--installedresistor from the (SR) and (+) terminals.

3. Connect the field--supplied RED wire to (+) spadeconnector on the return air enthalpy sensor and the(SR+) terminal on the enthalpy controller. Connectthe BLK wire to (S) spade connector on the return airenthalpy sensor and the (SR) terminal on the enthalpycontroller.

NOTE: The enthalpy control must be set to the “D”setting for differential enthalpy control to work properly.

The enthalpy control receives the indoor and returnenthalpy from the outdoor and return air enthalpy sensorsand provides a dry contact switch input to thePremierLink controller. A closed contact indicates thatoutside air is preferred to the return air. An open contactindicates that the economizer should remain at minimumposition.

Indoor Air Quality (CO2 sensor) — The indoor air qualitysensor accessory monitors space carbon dioxide (CO2)levels. This information is used to monitor IAQ levels.Several types of sensors are available, for wall mountingin the space or in return duct, with and without LCDdisplay, and in combination with space temperaturesensors. Sensors use infrared technology to measure thelevels of CO2 present in the space air.

The CO2 sensors are all factory set for a range of 0 to2000 ppm and a linear mA output of 4 to 20. Refer to theinstructions supplied with the CO2 sensor for electricalrequirements and terminal locations. See Fig. 51 fortypical CO2 sensor wiring schematic.

48HC

Page 41: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

41

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 12 1

H G 24 VACOR

24 VDC

NC ALARMRELAYCONTACTS

COMNO }

0-10VDCSIG COM (J4-6)4-20mA (J4-5)

+

+-

+ -

C07134

Fig. 51 -- Indoor/Outdoor Air Quality (CO2) Sensor(33ZCSENCO2) -- Typical Wiring Diagram

To accurately monitor the quality of the air in theconditioned air space, locate the sensor near a return--airgrille (if present) so it senses the concentration of CO2leaving the space. The sensor should be mounted in alocation to avoid direct breath contact.

Do not mount the IAQ sensor in drafty areas such as nearsupply ducts, open windows, fans, or over heat sources.Allow at least 3 ft (0.9 m) between the sensor and anycorner. Avoid mounting the sensor where it is influencedby the supply air; the sensor gives inaccurate readings ifthe supply air is blown directly onto the sensor or if thesupply air does not have a chance to mix with the room airbefore it is drawn into the return airstream.

Wiring the Indoor Air Quality Sensor —

For each sensor, use two 2--conductor 18 AWG (AmericanWire Gage) twisted--pair cables (unshielded) to connectthe separate isolated 24 vac power source to the sensorand to connect the sensor to the control board terminals.

To connect the sensor to the control, identify the positive(4 to 20 mA) and ground (SIG COM) terminals on thesensor. See Fig. 51. Connect the 4--20 mA terminal toterminal TB1--9 and connect the SIG COM terminal toterminal TB1--7. See Fig. 52.

SEN J5-5

J5-6COM

9

7TB1

TB1IAQ Sensor

PL

24 VAC

C08274

Fig. 52 -- Indoor CO2 Sensor (33ZCSENCO2)Connections

Refer to Form 33CS--58SI, PremierLink™ Installation,Start--up, and Configuration Instructions, for detailedconfiguration information

Outdoor Air Quality Sensor (PNO 33ZCSENCO2 plusweatherproof enclosure) — The outdoor air CO2 sensor isdesigned to monitor carbon dioxide (CO2) levels in theoutside ventilation air and interface with the ventilationdamper in an HVAC system. The OAQ sensor is packagedwith an outdoor cover. See Fig. 53. The outdoor air CO2sensor must be located in the economizer outside air hood.

COVER REMOVED SIDE VIEW

C07135

Fig. 53 -- Outdoor Air Quality Sensor Cover

Wiring the Outdoor Air CO2 Sensor — A dedicated powersupply is required for this sensor. A two--wire cable isrequired to wire the dedicated power supply for the sensor.The two wires should be connected to the power supplyand terminals 1 and 2.

To connect the sensor to the control, identify the positive(4 to 20 mA) and ground (SIG COM) terminals on theOAQ sensor. See Fig. 51. Connect the 4 to 20 mAterminal to 48HC’s terminal TB1--11. Connect the SIGCOM terminal to 48HC’s terminal TB1--13. See Fig. 54.

SEN J5-2

J5-3COM

13

11TB1

TB1 PLOAQ Sensor/RH Sensor

24 VAC

C08275

Fig. 54 -- Outdoor CO2 Sensor Connections

Refer to Form 33CS--58SI, PremierLink Installation,Start--up, and Configuration Instructions, for detailedconfiguration information.

Smoke Detector/Fire Shutdown (FSD) — This function isavailable only when PremierLink is configured for(Space) Sensor Mode. The unit is factory--wired forPremierLink FSD operation when PremierLink isfactory--installed.

On 48HC units equipped with factory--installed SmokeDetector(s), the smoke detector controller implements theunit shutdown through its NC contact set connected to theunit’s LCTB input. The FSD function is initiated via thesmoke detector’s Alarm NO contact set. The PremierLinkcommunicates the smoke detector’s tripped status to theCCN building control. See Fig. 24 for unit smoke detectorwiring.

Alarm state is reset when the smoke detector alarmcondition is cleared and reset at the smoke detector in theunit.

48HC

Page 42: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

42

Filter Status Switch — This function is available onlywhen PremierLink™ is configured for (Space) SensorMode.

PremierLink control can monitor return filter status in twoways: By monitoring a field--supplied/installed filterpressure switch or via supply fan runtime hours.

Using switch input: Install the dirty filter pressure switchaccording to switch manufacturer’s instructions, tomeasure pressure drop across the unit’s return filters.Connect one side of the switch’s NO contact set toLCTB’s THERMOSTAT--R terminal. Connect the otherside of the NO contact set to TB1--10. Setpoint for DirtyFilter is set at the switch. See Fig. 55.

R

10

TB1

LCTBThermostat

J4-4PL

Filter Switch (NO, close on rising pressure (high drop))

C08216

Fig. 55 -- PremierLink Filter Switch Connection

When the filter switch’s NO contact set closes as filterpressure drop increases (indicating dirt--laden filters), theinput signal to PremierLink causes the filter status point toread “DIRTY”.

Using Filter Timer Hours: Refer to Form 33CS--58SI forinstructions on using the PremierLink Configurationscreens and on unit alarm sequence.

Supply Fan Status Switch — The PremierLink control canmonitor supply fan operation through afield--supplied/installed differential pressure switch. Thissequence will prevent (or interrupt) operation of unitcooling, heating and economizer functions until thepressure switch contacts are closed indicating propersupply fan operation.

Install the differential pressure switch in the supply fansection according to switch manufacturer’s instructions.Arrange the switch contact to be open on no flow and toclose as pressure rises indicating fan operation.

Connect one side of the switch’s NO contact set toLCTB’s THERMOSTAT--R terminal. Connect the otherside of the NO contact set to TB1--8. Setpoint for SupplyFan Status is set at the switch. See Fig. 56.

R

8

TB1

LCTBThermostat

J4-6PL

Fan (Pressure) Switch (NO, close on rise in pressure)

C08118

Fig. 56 -- PremierLink Wiring Fan Pressure SwitchConnection

Remote Occupied Switch — The PremierLink controlpermits a remote timeclock to override the control’son--board occupancy schedule and place the unit intoOccupied mode. This function may also provide a “DoorSwitch” time delay function that will terminate coolingand heating functions after a 2--20 minute delay.

Connect one side of the NO contact set on the timeclockto LCTB’s THERMOSTAT--R terminal. Connect the otherside of the timeclock contact to the unit’s TB1--2 terminal.

J4-12

R

2

TB1

LCTBThermostat

PLTime Clock

Remote Occupied

C08214

Fig. 57 -- PremierLink Wiring Remote Occupied

Refer to Form 33CS--58SI for additional information onconfiguring the PremierLink control for Door Switchtimer function.

Power Exhaust (output) -- Connect the accessory PowerExhaust contactor coils(s) per Fig. 58.

Power Exhaust

J8-315

C

TB1

THERMOSTAT

PL

PEC TAN

GRA

LCTB

C08120

Fig. 58 -- PremierLink Power Exhaust OutputConnection

Space Relative Humidity Sensor — The RH sensor is notused with 48HC models at this time.

CCN Communication Bus — The PremierLink controllerconnects to the bus in a daisy chain arrangement.Negative pins on each component must be connected torespective negative pins, and likewise, positive pins oneach component must be connected to respective positivepins. The controller signal pins must be wired to the signalground pins. Wiring connections for CCN must be madeat the 3--pin plug.

At any baud (9600, 19200, 38400 baud), the number ofcontrollers is limited to 239 devices maximum. Bus lengthmay not exceed 4000 ft, with no more than 60 totaldevices on any 1000--ft section. Optically isolated RS--485repeaters are required every 1000 ft.

NOTE: Carrier device default is 9600 band.

COMMUNICATION BUS WIRE SPECIFICATIONS —The CCN Communication Bus wiring is field--suppliedand field--installed. It consists of shielded 3--conductorcable with drain (ground) wire. The cable selected mustbe identical to the CCN Communication Bus wire used forthe entire network.

See Table 19 for recommended cable.

48HC

Page 43: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

43

Table 19 – Recommended Cables

MANUFACTURER CABLE PART NO.Alpha 2413 or 5463American A22503Belden 8772Columbia 02525

NOTE: Conductors and drain wire must be at least 20AWG, stranded, and tinned copper. Individual conductorsmust be insulated with PVC, PVC/nylon, vinyl, Teflon, orpolyethylene. An aluminum/polyester 100% foil shieldand an outer jacket of PVC, PVC/nylon, chrome vinyl, orTeflon with a minimum operating temperature range of--20 C to 60 C is required. Do not run communication wirein the same conduit as or next to any AC voltage wiring.

The communication bus shields must be tied together ateach system element. If the communication bus is entirelywithin one building, the resulting continuous shield mustbe connected to ground at only one single point. If thecommunication bus cable exits from one building andenters another building, the shields must be connected tothe grounds at a lightning suppressor in each building (onepoint only).

Connecting CCN bus:

NOTE: When connecting the communication bus cable,a color code system for the entire network isrecommended to simplify installation and checkout. SeeTable 20 for the recommended color code.

Table 20 – Color Code Recommendations

SIGNAL TYPE CCN BUS WIRECOLOR

CCN PLUG PINNUMBER

+ Red 1Ground White 2--- Black 3

Connect the CCN (+) lead (typically RED) to the unit�sTB1--12 terminal. Connect the CCN (ground) lead(typically WHT) to the unit’s TB1--14 terminal. Connectthe CCN (--) lead (typically BLK) to the unit’s TB1--16terminal. See Fig. 59.

CCN Bus

J2-1

J2-2GND (WHT)

12

14TB1

J2-3– (BLK) 16TB1

TB1 PL+ (RED)

C08276

Fig. 59 -- PremierLink™ CCN Bus Connections

RTU--MP CONTROL SYSTEMThe RTU--MP controller, see Fig. 60, provides expandedstand--alone operation of the HVAC system plusconnection and control through communication withseveral Building Automation Systems (BAS) throughpopular third--party network systems. The availablenetwork systems are BACnet MP/TP, Modbus andJohnson J2. Communication with LonWorks is alsopossible by adding an accessory interface card to theRTU--MP. Selection of the communication protocol andbaud rate are made at on--board DIP switches.

Carrier’s diagnostic display tools BACviewer6 Handheldand Virtual BACview (loaded on a portable PC) must beused with the RTU--MP controller. Connection to theRTU--MP board is at the J12 access port, see Fig. 60.

The RTU--MP control is factory--mounted in the 48HCunit’s main control box, to the left of the LCTB. See Fig.61. Factory wiring is completed through harnessesconnected to the LCTB. Field connections for RTU--MPsensors will be made at the Phoenix connectors on theRTU--MP board. The factory--installed RTU--MP controlincludes the supply--air temperature (SAT) sensor. Theoutdoor air temperature (OAT) sensor is included in theFIOP/accessory EconoMi$er 2 package.

Refer to Table 21, RTU--MP Controller Inputs and Outputsfor locations of all connections to the RTU--MP board.

48HC

Page 44: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

44

C07129

Fig. 60 -- RTU--MP Multi--Protocol Control Board

48HC

Page 45: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

45

C08458

Fig. 61 -- RTU--MP System Control Wiring Diagram

48HC

Page 46: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

46

Table 21 – RTU--MP Controller Inputs and Outputs

POINT NAME BACnet OBJECTNAME TYPE OF I/O CONNECTION PIN

NUMBERSINPUTS

Space Temperature Sensor sptsens AI (10K Thermistor) J20---1, 2Supply Air Temperature sat AI (10K Thermistor) J2---1, 2Local Outside Air Temperature Sensor oatsens AI (10K Thermistor) J2---3, 4Space Temperature Offset Pot sptopot AI (100K Potentiometer) J20---3Indoor Air Quality iaq AI (4---20 ma) J4---2, 3Outdoor Air Quality oaq AI (4---20 ma) J4---5, 6Safety Chain Feedback safety DI (24 VAC) J1---9Compressor Safety compstat DI (24 VAC) J1---2Fire Shutdown firedown DI (24 VAC) J1---10Enthalpy Switch enthalpy DI (24 VAC) J2---6, 7Humidistat Input Status humstat DI (24 VAC) J5---7, 8

CONFIGURABLE INPUTS*Space Relative Humidity sprh AI (4---20 ma)

J4---2,3 or J4---5,6Outside Air Relative Humidity oarh AI (4---20 ma)Supply Fan Status fanstat DI (24 VAC)

J5---1,2 or J5---3,4 orJ5 5,6 or J5---7,8

Filter Status filtstat DI (24 VAC)Remote Occupancy Input remocc DI (24 VAC)

OUTPUTSEconomizer Commanded Position econocmd 4---20ma J2---5Supply Fan Relay State sf DO Relay (24VAC , 1A) J1---4Compressor 1 Relay State comp_1 DO Relay (24VAC , 1A) J1---8Compressor 2 Relay State comp_2 DO Relay (24VAC , 1A) J1---7Heat Stage 1 Relay State heat_1 DO Relay (24VAC , 1A) J1---6Heat Stage 2 Relay State heat_2 DO Relay (24VAC , 1A) J1---5Power Exhaust Relay State aux_2 DO Relay (24VAC , 1A) J11---3Dehumidification Relay State humizer DO Relay (24VAC, 1A) J11---7, 8

LEGENDAI --- Analog InputAO --- Analog OutputDI --- Discrete InputDO --- Discrete Output* These inputs (if installed) take the place of the default input on the specific channel according to schematic.Parallel pins J5---1 = J2---6, J5---3 = J1---10, J5---5 = J1---2 are used for field--- installation.Refer to the input configuration and accessory sections for more detail.

NOTE: Refer to Form 48--50H--T--2T for completeconfiguration of RTU--MP, operating sequences andtroubleshooting information. Refer to RTU--MP 3rd PartyIntegration Guide for details on configuration andtroubleshooting of connected networks. Have a copy ofthese manuals available at unit start--up.

The RTU--MP controller requires the use of a Carrierspace sensor. A standard thermostat cannot be used withthe RTU--MP system.

Supply Air Temperature (SAT) Sensor -- OnFIOP--equipped 48HC unit, the unit is supplied with asupply--air temperature (SAT) sensor (33ZCSENSAT).This sensor is a tubular probe type, approx 6--inches (12.7mm) in length. It is a nominal 10--k ohm thermistor. SeeTable 15 for temperature--resistance characteristic.

The SAT is factory--wired. The SAT probe is wire--tied tothe supply--air opening (on the horizontal opening end) inits shipping position.Remove the sensor for installation. Re--position the sensorin the flange of the supply--air opening or in the supply airduct (as required by local codes).

Drill or punch a 1/2--in. hole in the flange or duct. Usetwo field--supplied, self--drilling screws to secure thesensor probe in a horizontal orientation. See Fig. 42.

Outdoor Air Temperature (OAT) Sensor -- The OAT isfactory--mounted in the EconoMi$er 2 (FIOP oraccessory). It is a nominal 10k ohm thermistor attached toan eyelet mounting ring. See Table 15 fortemperature--resistance characteristic.

EconoMi$er 2 -- The RTU--MP control is used withEconoMi$er2 (option or accessory) for outdoor airmanagement. The damper position is controlled directlyby the RTU--MP control; EconoMi$er 2 has no internallogic device.

Outdoor air management functions can be enhanced withfield--installation of these accessory control devices:

Enthalpy control (outdoor air or differential sensors)Space CO2 sensorOutdoor air CO2 sensor

48HC

Page 47: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

47

Field Connections -- Field connections for accessorysensors and input devices are made the RTU--MP, at plugsJ1, J2, J4, J5, J11 and J20. All field control wiring thatconnects to the RTU--MP must be routed through theraceway built into the corner post as shown in Fig. 35.The raceway provides the UL required clearance betweenhigh-- and low--voltage wiring. Pass the control wiresthrough the hole provided in the corner post, then feed thewires thorough the raceway to the RTU--MP. Connect tothe wires to the removable Phoenix connectors and thenreconnect the connectors to the board.

Space Temperature (SPT) Sensors

A field--supplied Carrier space temperature sensor isrequired with the RTU--MP to monitor space temperature.There are 3 sensors available for this application:

S 33ZCT55SPT, space temperature sensor with overridebutton

S 33ZCT56SPT, space temperature sensor with overridebutton and setpoint adjustment

S 33ZCT59SPT, space temperature sensor with LCD(liquid crystal display) screen, override button, andsetpoint adjustment

Use 20 gauge wire to connect the sensor to the controller.The wire is suitable for distances of up to 500 ft. Use athree--conductor shielded cable for the sensor and setpointadjustment connections. If the setpoint adjustment(slidebar) is not required, then an unshielded, 18 or 20gauge, two--conductor, twisted pair cable may be used.

Connect T--55 -- See Fig. 44 for typical T--55 internalconnections. Connect the T--55 SEN terminals toRTU--MP J20--1 and J20--2. See Fig. 62.

SEN

SEN

J20-1

J20-2

C08460

Fig. 62 -- RTU--MP T--55 Sensor Connections

Connect T--56 -- See Fig. 46 for T--56 internalconnections. Install a jumper between SEN and SETterminals as illustrated. Connect T--56 terminals toRTU--MP J20--1, J20--2 and J20--3 per Fig. 63.

SEN J20-1

J20-2SEN

SET

Jumper

J20-3SET

C08461

Fig. 63 -- RTU--MP T--56 Sensor Connections

Connect T--59 -- The T--59 space sensor requires aseparate, isolated power supply of 24 VAC. See Fig. 62for internal connections at the T--59. Connect the SENterminal (BLU) to RTU--MP J20--1. Connect the COMterminal (BRN) to J20--2. Connect the SET terminal (STOor BLK) to J20--3.

OR SET SEN

OPB COM- PWR+

BLU (SPT)

BLK (STO)

24 VAC

SENSORWIRING

POWERWIRING

BRN (COM)

NOTE: Must use a separate isolated transformer.

C07132

Fig. 64 -- Space Temperature Sensor Typical Wiring(33ZCT59SPT)

Economizer controls —

Outdoor Air Enthalpy Control (PNO HH57AC077) --

The enthalpy control (HH57AC077) is available as afield--installed accessory to be used with the EconoMi$er2damper system. The outdoor air enthalpy sensor is part ofthe enthalpy control. (The separate field--installedaccessory return air enthalpy sensor (HH57AC078) isrequired for differential enthalpy control. See below.)

Locate the enthalpy control in the economizer hood.Locate two GRA leads in the factory harness and connectthese leads to enthalpy control sensors 2 and 3. See Fig.49. Connect the enthalpy control power input terminals toeconomizer actuator power leads RED (connect to TR)and BLK (connect to TR1).

The outdoor enthalpy changeover setpoint is set at theenthalpy controller.

The enthalpy control receives the outdoor air enthalpyfrom the outdoor air enthalpy sensor and provides a drycontact switch input to the RTU--MP controller. A closedcontact indicates that outside air is preferred to the returnair. An open contact indicates that the economizer shouldremain at minimum position.

Differential Enthalpy Control — Differential enthalpycontrol is provided by sensing and comparing the outsideair and return air enthalpy conditions. Install the outdoorair enthalpy control as described above. Add and install areturn air enthalpy sensor.

48HC

Page 48: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

48

Return Air Enthalpy Sensor — Mount the return--airenthalpy sensor (HH57AC078) in the return--air duct. Thereturn air sensor is wired to the enthalpy controller(HH57AC077). See Fig. 50.

To wire the return air enthalpy sensor, perform thefollowing:

1. Use a 2--conductor, 18 or 20 AWG, twisted pair cableto connect the return air enthalpy sensor to the enthal-py controller.

2. At the enthalpy control remove the factory--installedresistor from the (SR) and (+) terminals.

3. Connect the field--supplied RED wire to (+) spadeconnector on the return air enthalpy sensor and the(SR+) terminal on the enthalpy controller. Connectthe BLK wire to (S) spade connector on the return airenthalpy sensor and the (SR) terminal on the enthalpycontroller.

NOTE: The enthalpy control must be set to the “D”setting for differential enthalpy control to work properly.

The enthalpy control receives the indoor and returnenthalpy from the outdoor and return air enthalpy sensorsand provides a dry contact switch input to the RTU--MPcontroller. A closed contact indicates that outside air ispreferred to the return air. An open contact indicates thatthe economizer should remain at minimum position.

Indoor Air Quality (CO2 sensor) — The indoor air qualitysensor accessory monitors space carbon dioxide (CO2)levels. This information is used to monitor IAQ levels.Several types of sensors are available, for wall mountingin the space or in return duct, with and without LCDdisplay, and in combination with space temperaturesensors. Sensors use infrared technology to measure thelevels of CO2 present in the space air.

The CO2 sensors are all factory set for a range of 0 to2000 ppm and a linear mA output of 4 to 20. Refer to theinstructions supplied with the CO2 sensor for electricalrequirements and terminal locations. See Fig. 51 fortypical CO2 sensor wiring schematic.

To accurately monitor the quality of the air in theconditioned air space, locate the sensor near a return--airgrille (if present) so it senses the concentration of CO2leaving the space. The sensor should be mounted in alocation to avoid direct breath contact.

Do not mount the IAQ sensor in drafty areas such as nearsupply ducts, open windows, fans, or over heat sources.Allow at least 3 ft (0.9 m) between the sensor and anycorner. Avoid mounting the sensor where it is influencedby the supply air; the sensor gives inaccurate readings ifthe supply air is blown directly onto the sensor or if thesupply air does not have a chance to mix with the room airbefore it is drawn into the return airstream.

Wiring the Indoor Air Quality Sensor —

For each sensor, use two 2--conductor 18 AWG (AmericanWire Gage) twisted--pair cables (unshielded) to connectthe separate isolated 24 vac power source to the sensorand to connect the sensor to the control board terminals.

To connect the sensor to the control, identify the positive(4 to 20 mA) and ground (SIG COM) terminals on thesensor. See Fig. 51. Connect the 4--20 mA terminal toterminal TB1--9 and connect the SIG COM terminal toterminal TB1--7. See Fig. 65.

SEN

COM

J4-2

J4-3

IAQ Sensor

24 VACC08462

Fig. 65 -- RTU--MP / Indoor CO2 Sensor(33ZCSENCO2) Connections

Outdoor Air Quality Sensor (PNO 33ZCSENCO2 plusweatherproof enclosure) — The outdoor air CO2 sensor isdesigned to monitor carbon dioxide (CO2) levels in theoutside ventilation air and interface with the ventilationdamper in an HVAC system. The OAQ sensor is packagedwith an outdoor cover. See Fig. 53. The outdoor air CO2sensor must be located in the economizer outside air hood.

Wiring the Outdoor Air CO2 Sensor — A dedicated powersupply is required for this sensor. A two--wire cable isrequired to wire the dedicated power supply for the sensor.The two wires should be connected to the power supplyand terminals 1 and 2.

To connect the sensor to the control, identify the positive(4 to 20 mA) and ground (SIG COM) terminals on theOAQ sensor. See Fig. 51. Connect the 4 to 20 mAterminal to 48HC’s terminal TB1--11. Connect the SIGCOM terminal to 48HC’s terminal TB1--13. See Fig. 66.

SEN

COM

J4-5

J4-6

OAQ Sensor/RH Sensor

24 VACC08463

Fig. 66 -- RTU--MP / Outdoor CO2 Sensor(33ZCSENCO2) Connections

On 48HC units equipped with factory--installed SmokeDetector(s), the smoke detector controller implements theunit shutdown through its NC contact set connected to theunit’s LCTB input. The FSD function is initiated via thesmoke detector’s Alarm NO contact set. ThePremierLink™ communicates the smoke detector’stripped status to the CCN building control. See Fig. 24 forunit smoke detector wiring.

The Fire Shutdown Switch configuration,MENU→Config→Inputs→input 5, identifies thenormally open status of this input when there is no firealarm.

Alarm state is reset when the smoke detector alarmcondition is cleared and reset at the smoke detector in theunit.

48HC

Page 49: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

49

Connecting Discrete Inputs

Filter Status

The filter status accessory is a field--installed accessory.This accessory detects plugged filters. When installingthis accessory, the unit must be configured for filter statusby setting MENU→Config→Inputs→input 3, 5, 8, or 9to Filter Status and normally open (N/O) or normallyclosed (N/C). Input 8 or 9 is recommended for easy ofinstallation. Refer to Fig. 60 and Fig. 61 for wireterminations at J5.

Fan Status

The fan status accessory is a field--installed accessory.This accessory detects when the indoor fan is blowing air.When installing this accessory, the unit must beconfigured for fan status by settingMENU→Config→Inputs→input 3, 5, 8, or 9 to FanStatus and normally open (N/O) or normally closed (N/C).Input 8 or 9 is recommended for easy of installation. Referto Fig. 60 and Fig. 61 for wire terminations at J5.

Remote Occupancy

The remote occupancy accessory is a field--installedaccessory. This accessory overrides the unoccupied modeand puts the unit in occupied mode. When installing thisaccessory, the unit must be configured for remoteoccupancy by setting MENU→Config→Inputs→input 3,5, 8, or 9 to Remote Occupancy and normally open (N/O)or normally closed (N/C).Also set MENU→Schedules→occupancy source to DIon/off. Input 8 or 9 is recommended for easy ofinstallation. Refer to Fig. 60 and Table 21 for wireterminations at J5.

Power Exhaust (output)

Connect the accessory Power Exhaust contactor coil(s) perFig. 67.

Power Exhaust

J11-3

CTHERMOSTAT

PEC TAN

GRA

LCTB

C08464

Fig. 67 -- RTU--MP Power Exhaust Connections

Space Relative Humidity Sensor -- The RH sensor is notused with 48HC models at this time.

Communication Wiring -- Protocols

General

Protocols are the communication languages spoken bycontrol devices. The main purpose of a protocol is tocommunicate information in the most efficient methodpossible. Different protocols exist to provide differentkinds of information for different applications. In the BASapplication, many different protocols are used, dependingon manufacturer. Protocols do not change the function ofa controller; just make the front end user different.The RTU--MP can be set to communicate on four differentprotocols: BACnet, Modbus, N2, and LonWorks. Switch 3(SW3) on the board is used to set protocol and baud rate.Switches 1 and 2 (SW1 and SW2) are used to set theboard’s network address. See Fig 67 for the switch settingper protocol. The 3rd party connection to the RTU--MP isthrough plug J19. Refer to the RTU--MP 3rd PartyIntegration Guide for more detailed information onprotocols, 3rd party wiring, and networking.NOTE: Power must be cycled after changing the SW1--3switch settings.

SW3 Protocol Selection

PROTOCOL DS8 DS7 DS6 DS5 DS4 DS3 DS2 DS1BACnet MS/TP(Master) Unused OFF OFF OFF ON OFF Select Baud Select Baud

Modbus(Slave) Unused OFF OFF ON ON OFF Select Baud Select Baud

N2(Slave) Unused OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF

LonWorks Unused ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF

NOTE:DS = Dip SwitchBACnet MS/TP SW3 example shown

Baud Rate SelectionsBAUD RATE DS2 DS19600 OFF OFF19,200 ON OFF38,400 OFF ON76,800 ON ON C07166

Fig. 68 -- RTU--MP SW3 Dip Switch Settings

48HC

Page 50: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

50

BACnet MS/TP

BACnet Master Slave/Token Passing (MS/TP) is used forcommunicating BACnet over a sub--network ofBACnet--only controllers. This is the default Carriercommunications protocol. Each RTU--MP module acts asan MS/TP Master. The speed of an MS/TP network canrange from 9600 to 76.8K baud. Physical Addresses canbe set from 01 to 99.

Modbus

The RTU--MP module can speak the Modicon ModbusRTU Protocol as described in the Modicon ModbusProtocol Reference Guide, PI--MBUS--300 Rev. J. Thespeed of a Modbus network can range from 9600 to 76.8Kbaud. Physical Addresses can be set from 01 to 99.

Johnson N2

N2 is not a standard protocol, but one that was created byJohnson Controls, Inc. that has been made open andavailable to the public. The speed of N2 network islimited to only 9600 baud. Physical Addresses can be setfrom 01 to 99.

LonWorks

LonWorks is an open protocol that requires the use ofEchelon’s Neuron microprocessor to encode and decodethe LonWorks packets. In order to reduce the cost ofadding that hardware on every module, a separateLonWorks Option Card (LON--OC) was designed toconnect to the RTU--MP.This accessory card is needed for LonWorks and has to beordered and connected using the ribbon cable to plug J15.The RTU--MP’s baud rate must be set to 38.4k tocommunicate with the LON--OC. The address switches(SW1 & SW2) are not used with LonWorks.

Local Access

BACview6 Handheld

The BACview6 is a keypad/display interface used toconnect to the RTU--MP to access the control information,read sensor values, and test the RTU, see Fig. 69. This isan accessory interface that does not come with the MPcontroller and can only be used at the unit. Connect theBACview6 to the RTU--MP’s J12 local access port. Thereare 2 password protected levels in the display (User andAdmin). The user password is defaulted to 0000 but canbe changed. The Admin password is 1111 and cannot bechanged. There is a 10 minute auto logout if a screen isleft idle. See Form 48--50H--T--2T, Appendix A fornavigation and screen content.

Virtual BACview

Virtual BACview is a freeware computer program thatfunctions as the BACview6 Handheld. The USB Linkinterface (USB--L) is required to connect a computer tothe RTU--MP board. The link cable connects a USB portto the J12 local access port. This program functions andoperates identical to the handheld.

RTU--MP Troubleshooting

Communication LEDs

The LEDs indicate if the controller is speaking to thedevices on the network. The LEDs should reflectcommunication traffic based on the baud rate set. Thehigher the baud rate the more solid the LEDs will appear.

C07170

Fig. 69 -- BACview6 Handheld Connections

48HC

Page 51: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

51

Table 22 – LEDsThe LEDs on the RTU--MP show the status of certain functions

If this LED is on... Status is...Power The RTU MP has powerRx The RTU MP is receiving data from the network segmentTx The RTU MP is transmitting data over the network segmentDO# The digital output is active

The Run and Error LEDs indicate control module and network status

If Run LED shows... And Error LED shows... Status is...2 flashes per second Off Normal

2 flashes per second 2 flashes,alternating with Run LED

Five minute auto---restart delay after sys-tem error

2 flashes per second 3 flashes,then off

Control module has just beenformatted

2 flashes per second 4 flashes,then pause

Two or more devices on this networkhave the same ARC156 network address

2 flashes per second On Exec halted after frequent system errorsor control programs halted

5 flashes per second On Exec start---up aborted, Boot is running

5 flashes per second Off Firmware transfer in progress, Boot isrunning

7 flashes per second 7 flashes per second, alternating withRun LED

Ten second recovery period after brown-out

14 flashes per second 14 flashes per second,alternating with Run LED Brownout

On On

Failure. Try the following solutions:S Turn the RTU---MP off, then on.S Format the RTU---MP.S Download memory to the RTU---MP.S Replace the RTU---MP.

48HC

Page 52: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

52

Table 23 – Troubleshooting Alarms

POINT NAMEBACnetOBJECTNAME

ACTION TAKEN BYCONTROL

RESETMETHOD PROBABLE CAUSE

Safety Chain Alarm safety_chainAlarm GeneratedImmediateShutdown

Automatic Over load Indoor Fan or Electric Heater overheat.

Fire Shutdown Alarm fire_alarmAlarm GeneratedImmediateShutdown

Automatic Smoke detected by smoke detector or configura-tion incorrect

Space Temp SensorFailure spt_alarm

Alarm GeneratedImmediateShutdown

Automatic Faulty, shorted, or open thermistor caused bywiring error or loose connection.

SAT Sensor Alarm sat_alarmAlarm GeneratedImmediateShutdown

Automatic Faulty, shorted, or open thermistor caused bywiring error or loose connection.

High Space Temp Alarm spt_hi Alarm Generated Automatic The space temperature has risen above the coolsetpoint by more than the desired amount.

Low Space Temp Alarm spt_lo Alarm Generated Automatic The space temperature has dropped below theheat setpoint by more than the desired amount.

High Supply Air Temp sat_hi Alarm Generated Automatic SAT is greater then 160 degrees for more than 5minutes.

Low Supply Air Temp sat_lo Alarm Generated Automatic The supply air temperature is below 35_F formore than 5 minutes.

Supply Fan Failed toStart sf_fail

Alarm GeneratedImmediatelydisable Operation

AutomaticTripped Circuit Breaker, Broken belt, Bad indoorfan motor, Configuration incorrect, Bad fan statusswitch.

Supply Fan in Hand sf_handAlarm GeneratedRamp downOperations

Automatic Bad Fan Status Switch, Configuration incorrect.

Compressor SafetyAlarm dx_compstat Alarm Generated Automatic Compressor would not start.

Setpoint Slider Alarm slide_alarm Alarm GeneratedOffset set to zero Automatic STO sensor is open or shorted for more then 5

seconds.

Dirty Filter Alarm filter Alarm Generated

Automatic/reset timerwhen config-ured with orwithoutswitch

Dirty Filter, supply fan run time exceeded, filterswitch configuration wrong.

Switch ConfigurationAlarm sw_cfg_alarm

Alarm GeneratedDisable misconfi-gured switchfunctions

Configurecorrectly

More than one binary input is configured for thesame purpose. More then one discrete input isconfigured to provide the same function.

Misconfigured Analog In-put an_cfg_alarm

Alarm GeneratedDisable 4 selectableanalog inputs

Configurecorrectly

More then one analog input is configured to pro-vide the same function.

OAT Sensor Alarm oat_alarm

Alarm GeneratedEconomizer and Lowambient DX coolinglockout disabled.

Automatic Faulty, shorted, or open thermistor caused bywiring error or loose connection.

Space RH Sensor Alarm sprh_alarmAlarm GeneratedDehumidificationdisabled

Automatic Sensor reading is out of range. Bad sensor, badwiring, or sensor configured incorrectly.

Outdoor RH SensorAlarm oarh_alarm Alarm Generated Automatic Sensor reading is out of range. Bad sensor, bad

wiring, or sensor configured incorrectly.

High Space Humidity sprh_hi Alarm Generated Automatic IRH is greater then 70% for more then 10 min-utes.

Low Space Humidity sprh_lo Alarm Generated Automatic IRH is less then 35% for more then 10 minutes.

IAQ Sensor Alarm iaq_alarm

Alarm GeneratedDisables IAQOperation Econo-mizer moves to mini-mum position

Automatic Sensor reading is out of range. Bad sensor, badwiring, or sensor configured incorrectly.

OAQ Sensor Alarm oaq_alarm Alarm Generated SetOAQ to 400 Automatic Sensor reading is out of range. Bad sensor, bad

wiring, or sensor configured incorrectly.High Carbon DioxideLevel co2_hi Alarm Generated Automatic CO2 reading is above 1200ppm.

Supply Fan RuntimeAlarm sf_rntm Alarm Generated clear the

timer Supply fan run time exceeded user defined limit.

Compressor 1 RuntimeAlarm dx1_rntm Alarm Generated clear the

timer Compressor run time limit is exceeded.

Compressor 2 RuntimeAlarm dx2_rntm Alarm Generated clear the

timer Compressor run time limit is exceeded.

48HC

Page 53: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

53

AlarmsAlarms can be checked through the network and/or thelocal access. All the alarms are listed in Table 23 withname, object name, action taken by control, reset method,and probable cause. There are help screens for each alarmon the local access display and listed in Form48--50H--T--2T, Appendix A: Help Screens. Some alarmsare explained in detail below.

Safety Chain Alarm

This alarm occurs immediately if the supply--fan internaloverload trips or if an electric--heat limit switch trips. TheUnit Status will be Shutdown and the System Mode willbe Disable. When this happens LCTB (R terminal) willnot have 24 VAC, but the RTU--MP board will still bepowered. All unit operations stop immediately and willnot restart until the alarm automatically clears. There areno configurations for this alarm; it is all based on internalwiring. This alarm will never occur if Fire ShutdownAlarm is active.

Fire Shutdown Alarm

This alarm occurs immediately when the smoke detectorsenses smoke. The Unit Status will be Shutdown and theSystem Mode will be Disable. All unit operations stopimmediately and will not restart until the alarmautomatically clears. If there is not a smoke detectorinstalled or the smoke detector did not trip, check inputconfigurations.

Space Temp Sensor Failure

This alarm occurs if the space sensor wired to theRTU--MP is disconnected or shorted for more then 10seconds. When this occurs the Unit Status will beShutdown and the System Mode will be Run. Sensor,sensor connections, wiring, board connection, andconfigurations should be checked for faults or errors.Alarm will reset automatically when cause is fixed.

SAT Sensor Alarm

This alarm occurs immediately when the supply airtemperature sensor wired to the RTU--MP is disconnectedor shorted. When this occurs the Unit Status will beShutdown and the System Mode will be Run. Sensor,sensor connections, wiring, board connection, andconfigurations should be checked for faults or errors.Alarm will reset automatically when cause is fixed.

Switch Configuration Alarm

This occurs if more than one binary input (inputs 3, 5, 8,and 9) is configured for the same function. When thishappens the two inputs (or more) configured wrong willbe disabled as an inputs. This alarm will automatically becleared when configuration is corrected.

An example of this would be: Input 3 = CompressorSafety, input 5 = Fan Status, input 8 = Fan Status, andinput 9 = Humidistat; the alarm would be active, unitwould run, compressor safety and humidistat wouldfunction normally, and Fan Status (inputs 5 & 8) will beinterpreted as “No Function.”

Misconfigured Analog Input

This occurs if more than one analog input (inputs 1 & 2)is configured for the same sensor. When this happens thetwo inputs will be disabled as inputs. This alarm willautomatically be cleared when configuration is corrected.An example of this would be: Input 1 = IAQ Sensor, input2 = IAQ Sensor; the alarm would be active, unit wouldrun, but the IAQ Sensor (inputs 1 & 2) will be interpretedas “No Function.”

Third Party Networking

Third party communication and networkingtroubleshooting should be done by or with assistance fromthe front end 3rd party technician. A Module StatusReport (Modstat) can be run from the BACview6, seeTable 24 to perform. This lists information about theboard status and networking state. For basictroubleshooting, see Table 25. Refer to the RTU--MP 3rdParty Integration Guide for additional information.

BACnet MS/TP1. Verify that the BAS and controller are both set tospeak the BACnet MS/TP protocol. The protocol ofthe controller is set via SW3 (switches 3, 4, 5, and 6).The protocol can also be verified by getting a Modstatof the controller through the BACview. Hit the “FN”key and the ’.’ key at the same time to pull up aModstat. Scroll to the bottom of the page and there isa section entitled “Network Communications.” Theactive protocol and baud rate will be shown in thissection.

2. Verify that the BAS and controller are set for thesame baud rate. The baud rate of the controller is setvia SW3 (switches 1 and 2). The baud rate can alsobe verified via the BACview by obtaining a Modstat.(See Fig. 68.)

3. Verify that the BAS is configured to speak 2--wireEIA--485 to the controller. The BAS may have to con-figure jumper or DIP switches on their end.

4. Verify that the BAS and the controller have the samecommunication settings (8 data bits, No Parity, and 1stop bit).

5. Verify that the controller has a unique MAC addresson the MS/TP bus. The controller’s MS/TP MAC ad-dress is set by its rotary address switches.

6. Verify proper wiring between the BAS and the con-troller.

7. Verify that the BAS is reading or writing to the properBACnet objects in the controller. Download the latestpoints list for the controller to verify.

48HC

Page 54: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

54

8. Verify that the BAS is sending his requests to theproper MS/TP MAC address of our controller.

9. Present the BAS company with a copy of our control-ler’s BACnet PICS so that they know which BACnetcommands are supported. See below.

10. In certain situations, it may be necessary to tweak theMS/TP Protocol timing settings through the BAC-view6. There are two settings that may be tweaked:

S Max Masters: Defines the highest MS/TP Master MACaddress on this MS/TP network. For example, if thereare 3 master nodes on an MS/TP network, and theirMAC addresses are 1, 8, and 16, then Max Masterswould be set to 16 (since this is the highest MS/TPMAC address on the network). This property optimizesMS/TP network communications by preventing tokenpasses and “poll for master” requests to non--existentMaster nodes (i.e., in the above example, MAC address16 would know to pass the token back to MAC address1 instead of counting up to MAC address 127). EachMS/TP master node on the network must have theirMax Masters set to this same value. The default is 127.

Device Instance: 0160001

1 PRGs loaded. 1 PRGs running.

Module status: Firmware sections validated in flash memory ============================================ Boot16-H - v2.06:001 Jun 19 2007 RTU-MP DRIVER - v2.09:050 Jun 26 2007

Reset counters: 11 Power failures 0 Brownouts 18 Commanded warm boots 22 Commanded cold boots 0 System errors 0 Watchdog timeouts

System error message history: Type Specific Warning message history: Information message history: POWERUP: BACnet reinitialize warmstart 06/29/07 10:49:40 Menu file not found. 06/29/07 10:48:35

ARC156 reconfigurations during the last hour (cleared upon reset): Total ....................... 0 Initiated by this node ...... 0

Core board hardware: Type=147, board=34, manufactured on 05/14/2007, S/N 21A740188N RAM: 1024 kBytes; FLASH: 1024 kBytes, type = 3 Base board hardware: Type=147, board=71, manufactured on 05/14/2007, S/N RMP750037N

Largest free heap space = 65536.

Database size = 742082 , used = 352162, free = 389920.

Raw physical switches: 0x01280000

Module Communications: Network Protocol=BACnet MSTP Master Network Baud Rate=9600 bps

C07195

Fig. 70 -- Module Status Report (Modstat) Example

48HC

Page 55: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

55

Table 24 – Manufacture DateWhen troubleshooting, you may need to know a control module’s manufacture date

Obtain the manufacture date froma...

Notes

Module status report (modstat) To obtain a modstat with BACview6:1. Press Function (FN) key and hold.2. Then press period (.)3. Release both buttons.The report shows the date under Main board hardware.

Sticker on the back of the main controlmodule board”Serial No: RMPYMxxxxN”(Bar Coded & Typed Number)

The serial numbers are unique and contain embedded information:“RMP” --- These first three digits are unique to RTU---MP and are used as an identifier.“YM” --- These two digits identify the last digit of the year and month (in hex, A=10/Oct)

of manufacture. ”74” would represent a date of manufacture of ”April 2007”.“xxxx” --- These four digits represent the sequential number of units produced for a given

product for the mentioned manufacturing time period.“N” --- This final digit represents the decade and toggles between ”N” and ”M” every

ten years.

Table 25 – Basic Protocol Troubleshooting

Problem Possible cause Corrective actionNo communication with 3rdparty vendor

Incorrect settings on SW1, SW2 and SW3 Verify and correct switch settings. Cyclepower to RTU---MP after changing switchsettings.

RS485 Port has no voltage output Verify RTU---MP has correct power supply(check with RTU---MP disconnected from RS485 commu-nication bus)

Possible bad driver on board.

Bacnet @ 9600/19.2K --- .01 to .045vdc Check RS485 bus for external before re-connecting to the bus

Bacnet @ 38.4K --- .06 to .09vdc Voltage, shorts or groundingBacnet @ 76.8K --- .1vdc before reconnecting to the bus

Modbus @ 9600 --- 76.8K --- .124vdcN2 @ 9600 --- .124vdc

Verify devices are daisy chained and repeaters and biasterminators are correctly installed

Check 3rd party vendor RS485 commu-nication wiring guidelines and trouble-shooting procedures

S MaxInfo Frames: This property defines the maximumnumber of responses that will be sent when ourcontroller gets the token. A valid number is any positiveinteger. The default is 10 and should be ideal for themajority of applications. In cases where the controller isthe target of many requests, this number could beincreased as high as 100 or 200.

NOTE: MS/TP networks can be comprised of bothMaster and Slave nodes. Valid MAC addresses for Masternodes are 0 -- 127 and valid addresses for Slave nodes are0 -- 254.NOTE: See RTU--MP 3rd Party Integration Guide (oralternatively Form 48--50H--T--1T Appendix) for ProtocolMaps.

Table 26 – Modbus Exception Codes that May beReturned From This Controller

CODE NAME MEANING

01 Illegal FunctionThe Modbus function code usedin the query is not supported bythe controller.

02 Illegal Data AddressThe register address used in thequery is not supported by thecontroller.

04 Slave Device Failure

The Modbus Master has at-tempted to write to a non---exist-ent register or a read---only regis-ter in the controller.

Modbus1. Verify that the BAS and controller are both set tospeak the Modbus RTU protocol. The protocol of thecontroller is set via SW3 (switches 3, 4, 5, and 6).The protocol can also be verified by getting a Modstatof the controller through the BACview. Hit the ”FN”key and the ’.’ key at the same time to pull up aModstat. Scroll to the bottom of the page and there isa section entitled “Network Communications.” Theactive protocol and baud rate will be shown in thissection.

2. Verify that the BAS and controller are set for thesame baud rate. The baud rate of the controller is setvia SW3 (switches 1 and 2). The baud rate can alsobe verified via the BACview by obtaining a Modstat(see above).

3. Verify that the BAS is configured to speak 2--wireEIA--485 to the controller. The BAS may have to con-figure jumper or DIP switches on their end.

4. Verify that the BAS and the controller have the samecommunication settings (8 data bits, No Parity, and 1stop bit).

5. Verify that the controller has a unique Modbus slaveaddress. The controller’s Modbus slave address is setby its rotary address switches.

6. Verify that the BAS is using the proper Modbus func-tion codes to access data from our controller. Sup-ported function codes are shown above.

48HC

Page 56: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

56

7. Verify proper wiring between the BAS and the con-troller.

8. Verify that the BAS is reading or writing to the properModbus register numbers on the controller. Downloadthe latest points list for the controller to verify.

9. Verify that the BAS is sending his requests to theproper slave address of our controller.

NOTE: See RTU--MP 3rd Party Integration Guide (oralternatively Form 48--50H--T--1T, Appendix) for ModbusProtocol Conformance Statement.

N21. Verify that the BAS and controller are both set tospeak the N2 protocol. The protocol of the controlleris set via SW3 (switches 3, 4, 5, and 6). The protocolcan also be verified by getting a Modstat of the con-troller through the BACview. Hit the “FN” key andthe ’.’ key at the same time to pull up a Modstat.Scroll to the bottom of the page and there is a sectionentitled ”Network Communications.” The active pro-tocol and baud rate will be shown in this section.

2. Verify that the BAS and controller are set for 9600baud. The baud rate of the controller is set via SW3(switches 1 and 2). The baud rate can also be verifiedvia the BACview by obtaining a Modstat (see above).

3. Verify that the BAS is configured to speak 2--wireEIA--485 to the controller. The BAS may have to con-figure jumper or DIP switches on their end.

4. Verify that the BAS and the controller have the samecommunication settings (8 data bits, No Parity, and 1stop bit).

5. Verify that the controller has a unique N2 slave ad-dress on the N2 bus. The controller’s N2 slave ad-dress is set by its rotary address switches.

6. Verify proper wiring between the BAS and the con-troller.

7. Verify that the BAS is reading or writing to the propernetwork point addresses on the controller. Downloadthe latest points list for the controller to verify.

8. Verify that the BAS is sending his requests to theproper slave address of our controller.

NOTE: See RTU--MP 3rd Party Integration Guide (oralternatively Form 48--50H--T--1T Appendix) for N2Protocol Conformance Statement.

ECONOMIZER SYSTEMSThe 48HC units may be equipped with a factory--installedor accessory (field--installed) economizer system. Twotypes are available: with a logic control system(EconoMi$er IV) and without a control system(EconoMi$er2, for use with external control systems suchas PremierLink™). See Fig. 71 and Fig. 72 for componentlocations on each type. See Fig. 73 and Fig. 74 foreconomizer section wiring diagrams.

Both EconoMi$ers use direct--drive damper actuators.

ECONOMI$ER IVCONTROLLER

OUTSIDE AIRTEMPERATURE SENSOR

LOW AMBIENTSENSOR

ACTUATOR

WIRINGHARNESS

C06021

Fig. 71 -- EconoMi$er IV Component Locations

ECONOMI$ER2PLUG

BAROMETRICRELIEFDAMPER

OUTDOORAIR HOOD

HOODSHIPPINGBRACKET

GEAR DRIVENDAMPER

C06022

Fig. 72 -- EconoMi$er2 Component Locations

48HC

Page 57: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

57

POTENTIOMETERPOWER EXHMINIMUM POS.DCV MAX.DCV SETENTHALPY

DEFAULTS SETTINGS:MIDDLEFULLY CLOSEDMIDDLEMIDDLEC SETTING

(ACCESSORY)REMOTE MIN

POSITION POT

REMOTE POT (135 ohm)

(FIOP / ACCESSORY)IAQ SENSOR

2 8

71

BRN

RED

RED

BLU

BLK

BLK

WHT

BLK

BLK BLK

GRA

GRA GRAGRA

GRA

GRA

YELORN

ORN ORN

PNK

PNK

YEL YEL

YE

LB

LU

BLU BLU

BLU

BLU

PNK

PNK

PNK

VIO

VIO

VIO

BLK

BRN

BRN

BRN BRN

OAT TEMP /ENTHALPY SENSOR

(ACCESSORY)RAT/ENTHALPY SENSOR

+

5

AQ1

AQSO+

SO

SR+

SR

620Ω

N1

N

P1

T1

P

T

2V

2V

2V

10V

10V

10V

EXHSET

EXH

MINPOS

OPEN

DCVMAX

DCVSET

DCV

FREECOOL

A

B C

D

RED

RED RED

RED

RED RED

BRN

BRN

EC

ON

OM

ISE

RIV

BO

AR

D

TR TR1

24VacHOT

24VacCOM

-+

1

1

1

2

2

2

5

5

9

12

8

10

11

6

7

4

4

3

3

1

2

5

9

12

8

10

11

6

7

4

3

1

2

5

9

12

8

10

11

6

7

4

3

3

EF EF1

ECONOMIZERMOTOR

LA

(NOT USED)

(NOT USED)

(NOT USED)ESL

VIO

SAT

(FIOP / ACCY)ECONOMIZER

PL6 - RFOR STD

UNIT PL6

TAN

TO PWR EXHAUSTACCESSORY

ECONOMIZER NOTES:1. 620 OHM, 1 WATT 5% RESISTER SHOULD BE REMOVED ONLY WHENUSING DIFFERENTIAL ENTHALPY OR DRY BULB.2. IF A SEPERATE FIELD SUPPLIED 24V TRANSFORMER IS USED FOR THEIAQ SENSOR POWER SUPPLY, IT CANNOT HAVE THE SECONDARY OF THE TRANSFORMER GROUNDED.3. FOR FIELD INSTALLED REMOTE MINIMUM POSITION POT.REMOVE BLACK WIRE JUMPER BETWEEN P AND P1 AND SETCONTROL MINIMUM POSITION POT TO THE MINIMUM POSITION.

ECONOMIZER (FIOP / ACCESSORY)

ECONOMIZERUNIT WITHOUTECONOMIZER

C09339

Fig. 73 -- EconoMi$er IV Wiring

4

3

5

2

8

6

7

1

10

11

9

12

PINK

VIOLET

BLACK

BLUEY

ELL

OW

NOTE 1

NOTE 3

RUN

500 OHMRESISTOR

50HJ540573ACTUATORASSEMBLY

RED

WHITE

ECONOMISER2 PLUG

DIRECT DRIVEACTUATOR

4-20mA SIGNAL

OAT SENSOR

4-20 mATO J9 ONPremierLinkBOARD

24 VAC

TRANSFORMERGROUND

NOTES:1. Switch on actuator must be in run position for economizer to operate.2. PremierLink™ control requires that the standard 50HJ540569 outside-air sensor be replaced by either the CROASENR001A00 dry bulb sen

sor or HH57A077 enthalpy sensor.3. 50HJ540573 actuator consists of the 50HJ540567 actuator and a harness with 500-ohm resistor.

C08310

Fig. 74 -- EconoMi$er2 with 4 to 20 mA Control Wiring

48HC

Page 58: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

58

Table 27 – EconoMi$er IV Input/Output Logic

INPUTS OUTPUTS

Demand ControlVentilation (DCV)

Enthalpy*Y1 Y2

Compressor N Terminal†

Outdoor Return Stage1

Stage2

Occupied UnoccupiedDamper

Below set(DCV LED Off)

High(Free Cooling LED

Off)Low

On On On OnMinimum position ClosedOn Off On Off

Off Off Off Off

Low(Free Cooling LED

On)High

On On On Off Modulating** (betweenmin. position and full-

open)

Modulating** (be-tween closed andfull-open)On Off Off Off

Off Off Off Off Minimum position Closed

Above set(DCV LED On)

High(Free Cooling LED

Off)Low

On On On On Modulating†† (betweenmin. position and DCV

maximum)

Modulating†† (be-tween closed and

DCVmaximum)

On Off On Off

Off Off Off OffLow

(Free Cooling LEDOn)

HighOn On On Off

Modulating*** Modulating†††On Off Off OffOff Off Off Off

* For single enthalpy control, the module compares outdoor enthalpy to the ABCD setpoint.† Power at N terminal determines Occupied/Unoccupied setting: 24 vac (Occupied), no power (Unoccupied).** Modulation is based on the supply-air sensor signal.†† Modulation is based on the DCV signal.*** Modulation is based on the greater of DCV and supply-air sensor signals, between minimum position and either maximumposition (DCV) or fully open (supply-air signal).

††† Modulation is based on the greater of DCV and supply-air sensor signals, between closed and either maximum position(DCV) or fully open (supply-air signal).

C06053

Fig. 75 -- EconoMi$er IV Functional View

EconoMi$er IV

Table 27 provides a summary of EconoMi$er IV.Troubleshooting instructions are enclosed.

A functional view of the EconoMi$er is shown in Fig. 75.Typical settings, sensor ranges, and jumper positions arealso shown. An EconoMi$er IV simulator program isavailable from Carrier to help with EconoMi$er IVtraining and troubleshooting.

EconoMi$er IV Standard Sensors

Outdoor Air Temperature (OAT) Sensor

The outdoor air temperature sensor is a 10 to 20 mAdevice used to measure the outdoor-air temperature. Theoutdoor-air temperature is used to determine when theEconoMi$er IV can be used for free cooling. The sensor isfactory-installed on the EconoMi$er IV in the outdoorairstream. (See Fig. 76.) The operating range oftemperature measurement is 40_ to 100_F (4_ to 38_C).See Fig. 78.

48HC

Page 59: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

59

Supply Air Temperature (SAT) Sensor

The supply air temperature sensor is a 3 K thermistorlocated at the inlet of the indoor fan. (See Fig. 76.) Thissensor is factory installed. The operating range oftemperature measurement is 0° to 158_F (--18_ to 70_C).See Table 15 for sensor temperature/resistance values.

SUPPLY AIRTEMPERATURESENSORMOUNTINGLOCATION

SUPPLY AIRTEMPERATURESENSOR

C06033

Fig. 76 -- Supply Air Sensor Location

The temperature sensor looks like an eyelet terminal withwires running to it. The sensor is located in the “crimpend” and is sealed from moisture.

Outdoor Air Lockout Sensor

The EconoMi$er IV is equipped with an ambienttemperature lockout switch located in the outdoorairstream which is used to lock out the compressors belowa 42_F (6_C) ambient temperature. (See Fig. 71.)

EconoMi$er IV Control Modes

IMPORTANT: The optional EconoMi$er2 does notinclude a controller. The EconoMi$er2 is operated by a 4to 20 mA signal from an existing field-supplied controller(such as PremierLink™ control). See Fig. 73 for wiringinformation.Determine the EconoMi$er IV control mode before set upof the control. Some modes of operation may requiredifferent sensors. (See Table 22.) The EconoMi$er IV issupplied from the factory with a supply--air temperaturesensor and an outdoor-- air temperature sensor. This allowsfor operation of the EconoMi$er IV with outdoor air drybulb changeover control. Additional accessories can beadded to allow for different types of changeover controland operation of the EconoMi$er IV and unit.

Outdoor Dry Bulb Changeover

The standard controller is shipped from the factoryconfigured for outdoor dry bulb changeover control. Theoutdoor air and supply air temperature sensors areincluded as standard. For this control mode, the outdoortemperature is compared to an adjustable setpoint selectedon the control. If the outdoor-air temperature is above thesetpoint, the EconoMi$er IV will adjust the outside airdampers to minimum position. If the outdoor-airtemperature is below the setpoint, the position of theoutside air dampers will be controlled to provided freecooling using outdoor air. When in this mode, the LEDnext to the free cooling setpoint potentiometer will be on.

The changeover temperature setpoint is controlled by thefree cooling setpoint potentiometer located on the control.(See Fig. 77.) The scale on the potentiometer is A, B, C,and D. See Fig. 78 for the corresponding temperaturechangeover values.

C06034

Fig. 77 -- EconoMi$er IV Controller Potentiometerand LED Locations

LED ON

LED ON

LED ON

LED ON

LED OFF

19

18

LED OFF

LED OFF

LED OFF

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

940 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100

DEGREES FAHRENHEIT

mA

D

C

B

A

C06035

Fig. 78 -- Outside Air Temperature ChangeoverSetpoints

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

0.13 0.20 0.22 0.25 0.30 0.35 0.40 0.45 0.50

STATIC PRESSURE (in. wg)FLO

WIN

CU

BIC

FE

ET

PE

RM

INU

TE

(cfm

)

C06031

Fig. 79 -- Outdoor--Air Damper Leakage

48HC

Page 60: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

60

Differential Dry Bulb ControlFor differential dry bulb control the standard outdoor drybulb sensor is used in conjunction with an additionalaccessory dry bulb sensor (part numberCRTEMPSN002A00). The accessory sensor must bemounted in the return airstream. (See Fig. 80.) Wiring isprovided in the EconoMi$er IV wiring harness. (See Fig.71.)

ECONOMI$ERIV

ECONOMI$ERIVCONTROLLER

GROMMET

RETURN AIRSENSOR

RETURN DUCT(FIELD-PROVIDED)

C07085

Fig. 80 -- Return Air Temperature or Enthalpy SensorMounting Location

In this mode of operation, the outdoor-air temperature iscompared to the return-air temperature and the lowertemperature airstream is used for cooling. When using thismode of changeover control, turn the enthalpy setpointpotentiometer fully clockwise to the D setting. (See Fig.77.)

Outdoor Enthalpy Changeover

For enthalpy control, accessory enthalpy sensor (partnumber HH57AC078) is required. Replace the standardoutdoor dry bulb temperature sensor with the accessoryenthalpy sensor in the same mounting location. (See Fig.80.) When the outdoor air enthalpy rises above theoutdoor enthalpy changeover setpoint, the outdoor-airdamper moves to its minimum position. The outdoorenthalpy changeover setpoint is set with the outdoorenthalpy setpoint potentiometer on the EconoMi$er IVcontroller. The setpoints are A, B, C, and D. (See Fig. 81.)The factory-installed 620-ohm jumper must be in placeacross terminals SR and SR+ on the EconoMi$er IVcontroller.

CONTROLCURVE

ABCD

CONTROL POINTAPPROX. deg. F (deg. C)

AT 50% RH

73 (23)70 (21)67 (19)63 (17)

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

32

34

36

38

40

42

44

46

90100

8070

6050

40

30

20

10

ENTHALP

Y BTU

PER P

OUND D

RY AIR

85(29)

90(32)

95(35)

100(38)

105(41)

110(43)

35(2)

35(2)

40(4)

40(4)

105(41)

110(43)

45(7)

45(7)

50(10)

50(10)

55(13)

55(13)

60(16)

60(16)

65(18)

65(18)

70(21)

70(21)

75(24)

75(24)

80(27)

80(27)

85(29)

90(32)

95(35)

100(38)

A

A

B

B

C

C

D

D

RE

LATI

VE

HU

MID

ITY

(%)

HIGH LIMITCURVE

APPROXIMATE DRY BULB TEMPERATURE--degrees F (degrees C)

C06037

Fig. 81 -- Enthalpy Changeover Setpoints

48HC

Page 61: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

61

TR1

24 VacCOM

TR

24 VacHOT

1 2

3 4

5

EF EF1

+ _

P1

T1

P

T

N

EXH

2V 10V

EXH

Set

Set

2V 10V

2V 10V

DCV

DCV

FreeCool

B C

A D

SO+

SR+

SR

SO

AQ1

AQ

DCV

MinPos

Open

Max

N1

C06038

Fig. 82 -- EconoMi$er IV Control

Differential Enthalpy Control

For differential enthalpy control, the EconoMi$er IVcontroller uses two enthalpy sensors (HH57AC078 andCRENTDIF004A00), one in the outside air and one in thereturn air duct. The EconoMi$er IV controller comparesthe outdoor air enthalpy to the return air enthalpy todetermine EconoMi$er IV use. The controller selects thelower enthalpy air (return or outdoor) for cooling. Forexample, when the outdoor air has a lower enthalpy thanthe return air, the EconoMi$er IV opens to bring inoutdoor air for free cooling.Replace the standard outside air dry bulb temperaturesensor with the accessory enthalpy sensor in the samemounting location. (See Fig. 71.) Mount the return airenthalpy sensor in the return air duct. (See Fig. 80.)Wiring is provided in the EconoMi$er IV wiring harness.(See Fig. 71.) The outdoor enthalpy changeover setpoint isset with the outdoor enthalpy setpoint potentiometer onthe EconoMi$er IV controller. When using this mode ofchangeover control, turn the enthalpy setpointpotentiometer fully clockwise to the D setting.

Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Sensor Input

The IAQ input can be used for demand control ventilationcontrol based on the level of CO2 measured in the spaceor return air duct.Mount the accessory IAQ sensor according tomanufacturer specifications. The IAQ sensor should bewired to the AQ and AQ1 terminals of the controller.Adjust the DCV potentiometers to correspond to the DCVvoltage output of the indoor air quality sensor at theuser-determined setpoint. (See Fig. 83.)

0

1000

2000

3000

4000

5000

6000

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

800 ppm

900 ppm

1000 ppm

1100 ppm

RA

NG

EC

ON

FIG

UR

AT

ION

(ppm

)

DAMPER VOLTAGE FOR MAX VENTILATION RATE

CO SENSOR MAX RANGE SETTING2

C06039

Fig. 83 -- CO2 Sensor Maximum Range Settings

If a separate field-supplied transformer is used to powerthe IAQ sensor, the sensor must not be grounded or theEconoMi$er IV control board will be damaged.When using demand ventilation, the minimum damperposition represents the minimum ventilation position forVOC (volatile organic compounds) ventilationrequirements. The maximum demand ventilation positionis used for fully occupied ventilation.When demand ventilation control is not being used, theminimum position potentiometer should be used to set theoccupied ventilation position. The maximum demandventilation position should be turned fully clockwise.

Exhaust Setpoint Adjustment

The exhaust setpoint will determine when the exhaust fanruns based on damper position (if accessory powerexhaust is installed). The setpoint is modified with theExhaust Fan Setpoint (EXH SET) potentiometer. (See Fig.77.) The setpoint represents the damper position abovewhich the exhaust fans will be turned on. When there is acall for exhaust, the EconoMi$er IV controller provides a45 ± 15 second delay before exhaust fan activation toallow the dampers to open. This delay allows the damperto reach the appropriate position to avoid unnecessary fanoverload.

Minimum Position Control

There is a minimum damper position potentiometer on theEconoMi$er IV controller. (See Fig. 77.) The minimumdamper position maintains the minimum airflow into thebuilding during the occupied period.When using demand ventilation, the minimum damperposition represents the minimum ventilation position forVOC (volatile organic compound) ventilationrequirements. The maximum demand ventilation positionis used for fully occupied ventilation.When demand ventilation control is not being used, theminimum position potentiometer should be used to set theoccupied ventilation position. The maximum demandventilation position should be turned fully clockwise.Adjust the minimum position potentiometer to allow theminimum amount of outdoor air, as required by localcodes, to enter the building. Make minimum positionadjustments with at least 10_F temperature differencebetween the outdoor and return-air temperatures.

48HC

Page 62: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

62

To determine the minimum position setting, perform thefollowing procedure:

1. Calculate the appropriate mixed air temperatureusing the following formula:

(TO xOA

) + (TR x RA) =TM100 100

TO = Outdoor-Air TemperatureOA = Percent of Outdoor AirTR = Return-Air TemperatureRA = Percent of Return AirTM = Mixed-Air TemperatureAs an example, if local codes require 10% outdoorair during occupied conditions, outdoor-airtemperature is 60_F, and return-air temperature is75_F.(60 x .10) + (75 x .90) = 73.5_F

2. Disconnect the supply air sensor from terminals Tand T1.

3. Ensure that the factory-installed jumper is in placeacross terminals P and P1. If remote damperpositioning is being used, make sure that theterminals are wired according to Fig. 60 and that theminimum position potentiometer is turned fullyclockwise.

4. Connect 24 vac across terminals TR and TR1.5. Carefully adjust the minimum positionpotentiometer until the measured mixed airtemperature matches the calculated value.

6. Reconnect the supply air sensor to terminals T andT1.

Remote control of the EconoMi$er IV damper is desirablewhen requiring additional temporary ventilation. If afield-supplied remote potentiometer (Honeywell partnumber S963B1128) is wired to the EconoMi$er IVcontroller, the minimum position of the damper can becontrolled from a remote location.To control the minimum damper position remotely,remove the factory-installed jumper on the P and P1terminals on the EconoMi$er IV controller. Wire thefield-supplied potentiometer to the P and P1 terminals onthe EconoMi$er IV controller. (See Fig. 82.)

Damper Movement

Damper movement from full open to full closed (or viceversa) takes 21/2 minutes.

Thermostats

The EconoMi$er IV control works with conventionalthermostats that have a Y1 (cool stage 1), Y2 (cool stage2), W1 (heat stage 1), W2 (heat stage 2), and G (fan). TheEconoMi$er IV control does not support spacetemperature sensors. Connections are made at thethermostat terminal connection board located in the maincontrol box.

Occupancy Control

The factory default configuration for the EconoMi$er IVcontrol is occupied mode. Occupied status is provided bythe black jumper from terminal TR to terminal N.

When unoccupied mode is desired, install a field--suppliedtimeclock function in place of the jumper between TR andN. When the timeclock contacts are closed, theEconoMi$er IV control will be in occupied mode. Whenthe timeclock contacts are open (removing the 24--v signalfrom terminal N), the EconoMi$er IV will be inunoccupied mode.

Demand Control Ventilation (DCV)

When using the EconoMi$er IV for demand controlledventilation, there are some equipment selection criteriawhich should be considered. When selecting the heatcapacity and cool capacity of the equipment, themaximum ventilation rate must be evaluated for designconditions. The maximum damper position must becalculated to provide the desired fresh air.Typically the maximum ventilation rate will be about 5 to10% more than the typical cfm required per person, usingnormal outside air design criteria.A proportional anticipatory strategy should be taken withthe following conditions: a zone with a large area, variedoccupancy, and equipment that cannot exceed the requiredventilation rate at design conditions. Exceeding therequired ventilation rate means the equipment cancondition air at a maximum ventilation rate that is greaterthan the required ventilation rate for maximumoccupancy. A proportional-anticipatory strategy will causethe fresh air supplied to increase as the room CO2 levelincreases even though the CO2 setpoint has not beenreached. By the time the CO2 level reaches the setpoint,the damper will be at maximum ventilation and shouldmaintain the setpoint.In order to have the CO2 sensor control the economizerdamper in this manner, first determine the damper voltageoutput for minimum or base ventilation. Base ventilationis the ventilation required to remove contaminants duringunoccupied periods. The following equation may be usedto determine the percent of outside air entering thebuilding for a given damper position. For best results thereshould be at least a 10 degree difference in outside andreturn-air temperatures.

(TO xOA

) + (TR x RA) =TM100 100

TO = Outdoor-Air TemperatureOA = Percent of Outdoor AirTR = Return-Air TemperatureRA = Percent of Return AirTM = Mixed-Air Temperature

Once base ventilation has been determined, set theminimum damper position potentiometer to the correctposition.The same equation can be used to determine the occupiedor maximum ventilation rate to the building. For example,an output of 3.6 volts to the actuator provides a baseventilation rate of 5% and an output of 6.7 volts providesthe maximum ventilation rate of 20% (or base plus 15 cfmper person). Use Fig. 83 to determine the maximumsetting of the CO2 sensor. For example, an 1100 ppmsetpoint relates to a 15 cfm per person design.

48HC

Page 63: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

63

Use the 1100 ppm curve on Fig. 83 to find the point whenthe CO2 sensor output will be 6.7 volts. Line up the pointon the graph with the left side of the chart to determinethat the range configuration for the CO2 sensor should be1800 ppm. The EconoMi$er IV controller will output the6.7 volts from the CO2 sensor to the actuator when theCO2 concentration in the space is at 1100 ppm. The DCVsetpoint may be left at 2 volts since the CO2 sensorvoltage will be ignored by the EconoMi$er IV controlleruntil it rises above the 3.6 volt setting of the minimumposition potentiometer.Once the fully occupied damper position has beendetermined, set the maximum damper demand controlventilation potentiometer to this position. Do not set to themaximum position as this can result in over-ventilation tothe space and potential high humidity levels.

CO2 Sensor Configuration

The CO2 sensor has preset standard voltage settings thatcan be selected anytime after the sensor is powered up.(See Table 28.)Use setting 1 or 2 for Carrier equipment. (See Table 28.)

1. Press Clear and Mode buttons. Hold at least 5seconds until the sensor enters the Edit mode.

2. Press Mode twice. The STDSET Menu will appear.

Table 28 – EconoMi$er IV Sensor Usage

APPLICATIONECONOMI$ER IV WITH OUTDOOR AIR DRY

BULB SENSORAccessories Required

Outdoor AirDry Bulb

None. The outdoor air dry bulb sensor isfactory installed.

DifferentialDry Bulb CRTEMPSN002A00*

Single Enthalpy HH57AC078DifferentialEnthalpy HH57AC078 and CRENTDIF004A00*

CO2 for DCVControl using aWall-MountedCO2 Sensor

33ZCSENCO2

CO2 for DCVControl using aDuct-MountedCO2 Sensor

33ZCSENCO2† and33ZCASPCO2**

OR CRCBDIOX005A00††

* CRENTDIF004A00 and CRTEMPSN002A00 accessoriesare used on many different base units. As such, thesekits may contain parts that will not be needed for installa-tion.

† 33ZCSENCO2 is an accessory CO2 sensor.** 33ZCASPCO2 is an accessory aspirator box required forduct-mounted applications.

†† CRCBDIOX005A00 is an accessory that contains both33ZCSENCO2 and 33ZCASPCO2 accessories.

3. Use the Up/Down button to select the presetnumber. (See Table 28.)

4. Press Enter to lock in the selection.5. Press Mode to exit and resume normal operation.

The custom settings of the CO2 sensor can be changedanytime after the sensor is energized. Follow the stepsbelow to change the non-standard settings:

1. Press Clear and Mode buttons. Hold at least 5seconds until the sensor enters the Edit mode.

2. Press Mode twice. The STDSET Menu will appear.

3. Use the Up/Down button to toggle to the NONSTDmenu and press Enter.

4. Use the Up/Down button to toggle through each ofthe nine variables, starting with Altitude, until thedesired setting is reached.

5. Press Mode to move through the variables.6. Press Enter to lock in the selection, then press Modeto continue to the next variable.

Dehumidification of Fresh Air with DCV (DemandControlled Ventilation) Control

If normal rooftop heating and cooling operation is notadequate for the outdoor humidity level, an energyrecovery unit and/or a dehumidification option should beconsidered.

EconoMi$er IV Preparation

This procedure is used to prepare the EconoMi$er IV fortroubleshooting. No troubleshooting or testing is done byperforming the following procedure.

NOTE: This procedure requires a 9--v battery, 1.2kilo--ohm resistor, and a 5.6 kilo--ohm resistor which arenot supplied with the EconoMi$er IV.IMPORTANT: Be sure to record the positions of allpotentiometers before starting troubleshooting.1. Disconnect power at TR and TR1. All LEDs shouldbe off. Exhaust fan contacts should be open.

2. Disconnect device at P and P1.3. Jumper P to P1.4. Disconnect wires at T and T1. Place 5.6 kilo--ohmresistor across T and T1.

5. Jumper TR to 1.6. Jumper TR to N.7. If connected, remove sensor from terminals SO and +.Connect 1.2 kilo--ohm 4074EJM checkout resistoracross terminals SO and +.

8. Put 620--ohm resistor across terminals SR and +.9. Set minimum position, DCV setpoint, and exhaust po-tentiometers fully CCW (counterclockwise).

10. Set DCV maximum position potentiometer fully CW(clockwise).

11. Set enthalpy potentiometer to D.12. Apply power (24 vac) to terminals TR and TR1.

Differential Enthalpy

To check differential enthalpy:

1. Make sure EconoMi$er IV preparation procedure hasbeen performed.

2. Place 620--ohm resistor across SO and +.3. Place 1.2 kilo--ohm resistor across SR and +. TheFree Cool LED should be lit.

4. Remove 620--ohm resistor across SO and +. The FreeCool LED should turn off.

5. Return EconoMi$er IV settings and wiring to normalafter completing troubleshooting.

48HC

Page 64: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

64

Single Enthalpy

To check single enthalpy:

1. Make sure EconoMi$er IV preparation procedure hasbeen performed.

2. Set the enthalpy potentiometer to A (fully CCW). TheFree Cool LED should be lit.

3. Set the enthalpy potentiometer to D (fully CW). TheFree Cool LED should turn off.

4. Return EconoMi$er IV settings and wiring to normalafter completing troubleshooting.

DCV (Demand Controlled Ventilation) and PowerExhaust

To check DCV and Power Exhaust:

1. Make sure EconoMi$er IV preparation procedure hasbeen performed.

2. Ensure terminals AQ and AQ1 are open. The LED forboth DCV and Exhaust should be off. The actuatorshould be fully closed.

3. Connect a 9--v battery to AQ (positive node) and AQ1(negative node). The LED for both DCV and Exhaustshould turn on. The actuator should drive to between90 and 95% open.

4. Turn the Exhaust potentiometer CW until the ExhaustLED turns off. The LED should turn off when the po-tentiometer is approximately 90%. The actuatorshould remain in position.

5. Turn the DCV setpoint potentiometer CW until theDCV LED turns off. The DCV LED should turn offwhen the potentiometer is approximately 9--v. The ac-tuator should drive fully closed.

6. Turn the DCV and Exhaust potentiometers CCW untilthe Exhaust LED turns on. The exhaust contacts willclose 30 to 120 seconds after the Exhaust LED turnson.

7. Return EconoMi$er IV settings and wiring to normalafter completing troubleshooting.

DCV Minimum and Maximum Position

To check the DCV minimum and maximum position:

1. Make sure EconoMi$er IV preparation procedure hasbeen performed.

2. Connect a 9--v battery to AQ (positive node) and AQ1(negative node). The DCV LED should turn on. Theactuator should drive to between 90 and 95% open.

3. Turn the DCV Maximum Position potentiometer tomidpoint. The actuator should drive to between 20and 80% open.

4. Turn the DCV Maximum Position potentiometer tofully CCW. The actuator should drive fully closed.

5. Turn the Minimum Position potentiometer to mid-point. The actuator should drive to between 20 and80% open.

6. Turn the Minimum Position Potentiometer fully CW.The actuator should drive fully open.

7. Remove the jumper from TR and N. The actuatorshould drive fully closed.

8. Return EconoMi$er IV settings and wiring to normalafter completing troubleshooting.

Supply--Air Sensor Input

To check supply--air sensor input:

1. Make sure EconoMi$er IV preparation procedure hasbeen performed.

2. Set the Enthalpy potentiometer to A. The Free CoolLED turns on. The actuator should drive to between20 and 80% open.

3. Remove the 5.6 kilo--ohm resistor and jumper T toT1. The actuator should drive fully open.

4. Remove the jumper across T and T1. The actuatorshould drive fully closed.

5. Return EconoMi$er IV settings and wiring to normalafter completing troubleshooting.

EconoMi$er IV Troubleshooting Completion

This procedure is used to return the EconoMi$er IV tooperation. No troubleshooting or testing is done byperforming the following procedure.

1. Disconnect power at TR and TR1.2. Set enthalpy potentiometer to previous setting.3. Set DCV maximum position potentiometer to previ-ous setting. The DCV Maximum potentiometer mustbe fully closed when a CO2 sensor is not used

4. Set minimum position, DCV setpoint, and exhaust po-tentiometers to previous settings.

5. Remove 620--ohm resistor from terminals SR and +.6. Remove 1.2 kilo--ohm checkout resistor from termin-als SO and +. If used, reconnect sensor from termin-als SO and +.

7. Remove jumper from TR to N.8. Remove jumper from TR to 1.9. Remove 5.6 kilo--ohm resistor from T and T1. Recon-nect wires at T and T1.

10. Remove jumper from P to P1. Reconnect device at Pand P1.

11. Apply power (24 vac) to terminals TR and TR1.

48HC

Page 65: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

65

WIRING DIAGRAMSSee Fig. 84 through Fig. 89 for typical wiring diagrams.

C

L

G

NYEL

GRN/YEL

BLK

BRNDIRECTDRIVE

(NOTE 7)54321

VIO3 & 4 TON: TO GRA ON CONTROL BOARD 75 TON: TO VIO ON IFM TDR

TO "C" COIL & RESISTOR (3 & 4 TON ONLY)

(NOTE 6)

IFM

WHT BLKFIOP

NON-POWEREDCONVENIENCE

OUTLET

115VFIELDSUPPLY

GR

BLKBLKCCH

CCHTS

BLK

BLK

YEL

-48TM502526

TO INDICATE COMMON POTENTIALONLY: NOT TO REPRESENT WIRING

MARKED WIRE

LEGEND

X

TERMINAL (MARKED)

TERMINAL (UNMARKED)

X

X

TERMINAL BLOCK

SPLICE

SPLICE (MARKED)

FACTORY WIRING

FIELD CONTROL WIRING

FIELD POWER WIRING

ACCESSORY OR OPTIONAL WIRING

NOTES1. IF ANY OF THE ORIGINAL WIRE FURNISHED MUST BE REPLACED. IT MUST BE REPLACED WITH TYPE 90 C WIRE OR ITS EQUIVALENT.2. COMPRESSOR AND FAN MOTORS ARE THERMALLY PROTECTED.3. 208/230V UNIT TRAN IS WIRED FOR 230V UNIT. IF UNIT IS TO BE RUN WITH 208V POWER SUPPLY DISCONNECT BLK WIRE FROM 230V TAP AND CONNECT TO 200V TAP.4. USE COPPER, COPPER CLAD, ALUMINUM OR ALUMINUM CONNECTORS.5. USE COPPER CONDUCTOR ONLY.6. DO NOT DISCONNECT POWER PLUG OR SIGNAL WIRE WHILE UNDER LOAD.7. FACTORY WIRING FOR SIGNAL CONNECTION MAY BE REQUIRED WHEN USING FIELD INSTALLED ACCESSORIES - CONSULT INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION FOR PROPER SELECTION.

CIRCUIT BOARD TRACE

EQUIPGR

FIELD

POWER

SUPPLY

24V

BRN

24V

GRN/YEL

{ TO 24VSCHEMATIC

CM

IGC

SEE CONTROL SCHEMATIC

L1

H FC

C

R

S

OFM

CAP1

BLK

YEL

BRN

BLK

QT

BLK

YEL

YEL

BLU

COMP

BLK

YEL

YEL

BLK YEL

230 208 C

TRAN

IDM

VIO

YEL

BRN

CAP3

YEL

11 21

23 23

C

BLK

BM

VIO

YEL

YEL

YAC POWER 208/230-1-60

BRN

YEL

QT

C CONTACTOR,COMPRESSORCAP CAPACITORCB CIRCUIT BREAKERCCH CRANKCASE HEATERCCHTS CRANKCASE HEATER TEMP SWITCHCCN CARRIER COMFORT NETWORKCMP SAFE COMPRESSOR SAFETYCOMP COMPRESSOR MOTORDD DIRECT DRIVEDDC DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLFSD FIRE SHUT DOWNFU FUSEGR GROUNDGVR GAS VALVE RELAYHPS HIGH PRESSURE SWITCHHS HALL EFFECT SENSORI IGNITORIAQ INDOOR AIR QUALITY SENSORSIDM INDUCED DRAFT MOTORIFC INDOOR FAN CONTACTORIFM INDOOR FAN MOTORIGC INTEGRATED GAS CONTROLIRH INDOOR RELATIVE HUMIDITYLA LOW AMBIENT LOCKOUTLOOP PWR CURRENT LOOP POWERLPS LOW PRESSURE SWITCHLSM LIMIT SWITCH (MANUAL RESET)MGV MAIN GAS VALVE

OAQ OUTDOOR AIR QUALITYOAT OUTDOOR AIR TEMP. SENOFM OUTDOOR FAN MOTOROLR OVERLOAD RELAYPL PLUG ASSEMBLYPOT POTENTIOMETERPMR PHASE MONITOR RELAYQT QUADRUPLE TERMINALR RELAYRAT RETURN AIR TEMP. SENRMT OCC REMOTE OCCUPANCYRS ROLLOUT SWITCHSAT SUPPLY AIR TEMP. SENSORSEN SENSORSET SET POINT OFFSETSFS SUPPLY FAN STATUSTDR TIME DELAY RELAYTRAN TRANSFORMER

RED

BLK

C10268

Fig. 84 -- 1--Stage Unit Wiring Diagram -- Power (208/230--1--60) Single Phase, 60 Hz

48HC

Page 66: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

66

C

L

G

NYEL

GRN/YEL

BLK

BRNDIRECTDRIVE

(NOTE 7)54321

VIO3 & 4 TON: TO GRA ON CONTROL BOARD 75 TON: TO VIO ON IFM TDR

TO "C" COIL & RESISTOR (3 & 4 TON ONLY)

(NOTE 6)

IFM

WHT BLKFIOP

NON-POWEREDCONVENIENCE

OUTLET

115VFIELDSUPPLY

GR

BLK

BLKCCH

-48TM502527

BLK 2111

BLU 2313

IFC

IFM(1 PH)

CAP 2

CAP 1QT

QT

BLK

YEL

YEL

YEL

BRN

OFM

BLK

YEL

BRN

YEL

T1

1

T3

3

T2

2

BLK

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLU

YEL

COMP

IFM(3 PH)

BLK

YEL

BLKBLK

BLKYELYELYEL

11 21

13 23

C

230 200 C

BLK

YEL

TO INDICATE COMMON POTENTIALONLY: NOT TO REPRESENT WIRING

MARKED WIRE

LEGEND

X

TERMINAL (MARKED)

TERMINAL (UNMARKED)

X

X

TERMINAL BLOCK

SPLICE

SPLICE (MARKED)

FACTORY WIRING

FIELD CONTROL WIRING

FIELD POWER WIRING

ACCESSORY OR OPTIONAL WIRING

NOTES1. IF ANY OF THE ORIGINAL WIRE FURNISHED MUST BE REPLACED. IT MUST BE REPLACED WITH TYPE 90 C WIRE OR ITS EQUIVALENT.2. COMPRESSOR AND FAN MOTORS ARE THERMALLY PROTECTED. THREE PHASE MOTORS ARE PROTECTED AGAINST PRIMARY SINGLE PHASING CONDITIONS.3. 208/230V UNIT TRAN IS WIRED FOR 230V UNIT. IF UNIT IS TO BE RUN WITH 208V POWER SUPPLY DISCONNECT BLK WIRE FROM 230V TAP AND CONNECT TO 200V TAP.4. USE COPPER, COPPER CLAD, ALUMINUM OR ALUMINUM CONNECTORS.5. USE COPPER CONDUCTOR ONLY.6. DO NOT DISCONNECT POWER PLUG OR SIGNAL WIRE WHILE UNDER LOAD.7. FACTORY WIRING FOR SIGNAL CONNECTION: 3 - 5 TON =1. RELEOCATION OF SIGNAL CONNECTION MAY BE REQUIRED WHEN USING FIELD INSTALLED ACCESSORIES - CONSULT INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION FOR PROPER SELECTION.

CIRCUIT BOARD TRACE

EQUIPGR

FIELD

POWER

SUPPLY

460

TRAN24V

BRN

RED 24V

GRN/YEL{ TO 24VSCHEMATIC

YAC POWER 208/230V,460V 3 PH

BLU

1PH & DIRECTDRIVE IFM ONLY

TB

IDMCAP 3

QT

BLK 460VVIO 208/230V

YEL

YEL

BRN

CM

IGC

SEE CONTROL SCHEMATIC

BLK

L1 BLK

BLK

YEL

BM BLK

BRN

YEL

YEL

(3 TON BELT DRIVE 2)L1

L3

L2

PMR(ACCY)

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLU

C CONTACTOR,COMPRESSORCAP CAPACITORCB CIRCUIT BREAKERCCH CRANKCASE HEATERCCHR CRANKCASE HEATER RELAYCCHTS CRANKCASE HEATER TEMP SWITCHCCN CARRIER COMFORT NETWORKCMP SAFE COMPRESSOR SAFETYCOMP COMPRESSOR MOTORDD DIRECT DRIVEDDC DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLFSD FIRE SHUT DOWNFU FUSEGR GROUNDGVR GAS VALVE RELAYHPS HIGH PRESSURE SWITCHHS HALL EFFECT SENSORI IGNITORIAQ INDOOR AIR QUALITY SENSORSIDM INDUCED DRAFT MOTORIFC INDOOR FAN CONTACTORIFM INDOOR FAN MOTORIGC INTEGRATED GAS CONTROL

IRH INDOOR RELATIVE HUMIDITYLA LOW AMBIENT LOCKOUTLOOP PWR CURRENT LOOP POWERLPS LOW PRESSURE SWITCHLSM LIMIT SWITCH (MANUAL RESET)MGV MAIN GAS VALVEOAQ OUTDOOR AIR QUALITYOAT OUTDOOR AIR TEMP. SENOFM OUTDOOR FAN MOTOROLR OVERLOAD RELAYPL PLUG ASSEMBLYPOT POTENTIOMETERPMR PHASE MONITOR RELAYQT QUADRUPLE TERMINALR RELAYRAT RETURN AIR TEMP. SENRMT OCC REMOTE OCCUPANCYRS ROLLOUT SWITCHSAT SUPPLY AIR TEMP. SENSORSEN SENSORSET SET POINT OFFSETSFS SUPPLY FAN STATUSTDR TIME DELAY RELAYTRAN TRANSFORMER

YEL

BLK

BLK

YEL

YEL

4 2

8 6

CCHR 460/575V ONLY

BLKBLKCCH CCHTS 208/230V ONLY

BLK

BLKBLK

BLK

C10269

Fig. 85 -- 1--Stage Unit Wiring Diagram -- Power (208/230V, 460V 3 Phase)

48HC

Page 67: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

67

WHT BLKFIOP

NON-POWEREDCONVENIENCE

OUTLET

115VFIELDSUPPLY

GND

CLO2

FIOP/ACCY

CLO1

FIOP/ACCY

MM-1SPD CTL

TEMP SENSOR

F48TM501326

BLK 2111

BLU

BLU

2313

IFC

OFM2

BLK

YELorWHT

BRN

OFM1

BLK

YELorWHT

BRN

T1

T3

T2

BLK

BLK

YEL

BLU

BLU

YEL

COMP1

IFM

YEL

BLKBLK

BLKYELYELYEL

YEL

11 21

13 23

C1

230 200 C

BLK

YEL

TO INDICATE COMMON POTENTIALONLY: NOT TO REPRESENT WIRING

MARKED WIRE

LEGEND

X

TERMINAL (MARKED)

TERMINAL (UNMARKED)

X

X

TERMINAL BLOCK

SPLICE

SPLICE (MARKED)

FACTORY WIRING

FIELD CONTROL WIRING

FIELD POWER WIRING

ACCESSORY OR OPTIONAL WIRING

NOTES1. IF ANY OF THE ORIGINAL WIRE FURNISHED MUST BE REPLACED. IT MUST BE REPLACED WITH TYPE 90 C WIRE OR ITS EQUIVALENT.2. COMPRESSOR AND FAN MOTORS ARE THERMALLY PROTECTED. THREE PHASE MOTORS ARE PROTECTED AGAINST PRIMARY SINGLE PHASING CONDITIONS.3. 208/230V UNIT TRAN IS WIRED FOR 230V UNIT. IF UNIT IS TO BE RUN WITH 208V POWER SUPPLY DISCONNECT BLK WIRE FROM 230V TAP AND CONNECT TO 200V TAP.4. USE COPPER, COPPER CLAD, ALUMINUM OR ALUMINUM CONNECTORS.5. USE COPPER CONDUCTOR ONLY.

CIRCUIT BOARD TRACE

EQUIPGND

FIELD

POWER

SUPPLY

460

TRAN24V

BRN

RED 24V

GRN/YEL{ TO 24VSCHEMATIC

YAC POWER 208/230V,460V 3 PH TWO COMPRESSOR

IDM

CAP 3QT

BLK 460VVIO 208/230V

YEL

YEL

BRN

CM

IGC

SEE CONTROL SCHEMATIC

BLK

L1

BLK

H FC

CAP1

QT

BLK

L1

L2

L3

PMR(ACCY)

BLK

YEL

BLU

C CONTACTOR,COMPRESSORCAP CAPACITORCB CIRCUIT BREAKERCCH CRANKCASE HEATERCCN CARRIER COMFORT NETWORKCMP SAFE COMPRESSOR SAFFETYCLO COMPRESSOR LOCKOUTCOMP COMPRESSOR MOTORDDC DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLFSD FIRE SHUT DOWNFS FLAME SENSORFU FUSEGND GROUNDGVR GAS VALVE RELAYHPS HIGH PRESSURE SWITCHHS HALL EFFECT SENSORI IGNITORIAQ INDOOR AIR QUALITY SENSORSIDM INDUCED DRAFT MOTORIFC INDOOR FAN CONTACTORIFCB INDOOR FAN CIRCUIT BREAKERIFM INDOOR FAN MOTORIGC INTEGRATED GAS CONTROLIRH INDOOR RELATIVE HUMIDITYJMP JUMPERLA LOW AMBIENT LOCKOUTLOOP PWR CURRENT LOOP POWERLPS LOW PRESSURE SWITCHLSM LIMIT SWITCH (MANUAL RESET)LS LIMIT SWITCHMGV MAIN GAS VALVEOFR OUTDOOR FAN RELAY

OAQ OUTDOOR AIR QUALITYOAT OUTDOOR AIR TEMP. SENOFM OUTDOOR FAN MOTOROL OVERLOADPL PLUG ASSEMBLYPOT POTENTIOMETERPMR PHASE MONITOR RELAYQT QUADRUPLE TERMINALR RELAYRAT RETURN AIR TEMP. SENRMT OCC REMOTE OCCUPANCYRS ROLLOUT SWITCHSAT SUPPLY AIR TEMP. SENSORSEN SENSORSET SET POINT OFFSETSFS SUPPLY FAN STATUSTDR TIME DELAY RELAYTRAN TRANSFORMER

T1

T3

T2

RED

ORN

BRN COMP2

ORN

11 21

13 23

C2

BLK

YEL

BLK

4 2

8 6

OFR

YEL

YEL

BLK

BLK

BLK

BLK

YEL

YEL

2YEL

(08,12 HI STATIC ONLY)

IFCB

22

23

2111

13

12

BLU

BLK

3

1

BLK

BLKCCH2

BLK BLK

TC09,12 RTPF ONLY

BLK

BLKCCH1

BLK BLK

TC09,12 RTPF ONLY

C10270

Fig. 86 -- 2--Stage Unit Wiring Diagram -- Power (208/230V, 460V 3 Phase)

48HC

Page 68: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

68

SMOKE CONTROL

MODULE

FIOP/ACCESSORY169 10

ORN

BRN

POWER

24 VAC

6 17

14 3 5 4

NC

NO

BLU

TROUBLE

NC

ALARM

NO

RJ-45

RETURN

SMOKE

SENSOR

RJ-45

SUPPLY

SMOKE

SENSOR

FIOP/

ACCESSORY

RED

GRA

YEL

GRN

PNK

1 2 4 3 6 7 8 9

PL19-

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

DDC

1 65432 7

DDC

X

THERMO-

STATC G W2

W1

Y2

Y1 R

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

4

6

8

9

7

5

3

1010

2

1

ECON

1

2

3

4

SAT/OAT

BLU

YEL

BLK

RED

1 2 3 4 5 6

4 65321

CLO1/

COMP1

BRN

VIO

BLU

1

2

3

PMR

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

4

6

8

7

5

3

2

1

CONTLBOARD

WHT

ORN

BRN

BRN

BLK

RED

99

RED

DDC

1 2 3 4 5 6

CLO2/

COMP2

7

REMOTESHUTDOWN

UNIT

SHUTDOWN

SMOKESHUTDOWN

24V OUT

C

SMOKEALARM

JMP4

JMP3

JMP1

OCCUPANCY

JMP2

R

JMP6

GRA

GRA

GRA

PNK

BRN

RED

GRA

GRA

PNK

PNK

VIO

BRN

ORN

RED

1PNK

2VIO

3BRN

4ORN

1 65432 7

REHEAT

8

JMP5

JMP7

C

BLU

TERMINAL BOARD(SEE NOTE)

GRA

1010

RED

1111

RED

1212

DDC

PNK

T'STAT

4

5

3

2

1

6

8

9

7

10

4 6 75321BRN

GRN

PNK

ORN

YEL

BLU

WHT

BLU

FIELD

CONTROL

WIRING

HPS1

LPS1

CKT 1

LPS

BLU

BLU

HPS

BLK

BLK

CKT 2

HPS2

LPS2

C

ORN

24Vac

TR 3

4

EF1

EF

N1

N

EXH

OPEN

SR

ECONOMI$ER IV BOARD

BRN

ECONOMIZER

MOTOR

RED

WHT

BLK1

32

BLK

YEL

BLK

RED

OAT TEMP/

ENTHALPY SENSOR

Vac

24 +

-

SR+AQ

SO+ SOP

P1 T1

T

A

FREE

COOL

BC D

2V

DCV

SET

DCV

10V

2V

MAX

DCV

10VPOS

MIN

2V

SET

EXH

10V

AQ1

2 5

1

TR1

COM

HOT

7

IAQ8

(ACCESSORY)

REMOTE MIN

POSITION POT

(FIOP/ACCESSORY)

IAQ SENSOR

12

REMOTE POT (135 Ohm)

620

(ACCESSORY)

RAT/ENTHALPY SENSOR

GRA

+ S+ S

BLK

LA

(NOT USED)

(NOT USED)

7

BLU

ORN

VIO

PNK

(NOT USED)

TAN

TO PWR EXHAUST

ACCESSORY

ECONOMIZER NOTES:

1. 620 OHM, 1 WATT 5% RESISTER SHOULD BE REMOVED ONLY WHEN

USING DIFFERENTIAL ENTHALPY OR DRY BULB.

2. IF A SEPERATE FIELD SUPPLIED 24V TRANSFORMER IS USED FOR THE

IAQ SENSOR POWER SUPPLY, IT CANNOT HAVE THE SECONDARY OF THE

TRANSFORMER GROUNDED.

3. FOR FIELD INSTALLED REMOTE MINIMUM POSITION POT,

REMOVE BLACK WIRE JUMPER BETWEEN P AND P1 AND SET

CONTROL MINIMUM POSITION POT TO THE MINIMUM POSITION.

POTENTIOMETER DEFAULTS SETTINGS:

POWER EXH MIDDLE

MINIMUM POS. FULLY CLOSED

DCV MAX. MIDDLE

DCV SET MIDDLE

ENTHALPY C SETTING

PL6-R 6

11

10 8 2 3 4 1 5 9 12

GRA

VIO

PNK

VIO

PNK

RED

BRN

BRN

BRN

GRA

ORN

RED

YEL

BLK

RED

RED

RED

BRN

BLK

BLU

ECONOMIZER (FIOP/ACCESSORY)

RED

BRN

DDC

ONLY

ESL

IFM TDR

CONTROL

LOGIC

RR I SPT

NO

NC

VIO

GRA

RED

RED

CBRN

1K BLK

BLK

BLK

BRN

VIO

GRA

BRN

GRA

VIO

FROM DD IFM

HARNESS

3 & 4 TON

GRA

SEE NOTE #3

IFC

BRN

CGRA

ONLY WHEN

NO DD IFM

OR 1 PHASE

IDFM

3 & 4 TON

5 TON

2 WATT VIO

BRN

BRN

VIO

IFM DD

"C"

TO "C" COIL

3 & 4 TON

DD ONLY

3 PHASE ONLY

DD IFM

CBRN

-48TM502525

TRAN

24V

BLUYEL

7

12

11 9514328

106

GRA

PNK

VIO

YEL

BLU

BLK

BRN

RED

UNIT

FOR STD

PL6-R

7 12

11

951432810

6PL6

PNK

BRN

VIO

GRA

CBRN

BRN

CLO1 TERM BD

3

RED

FROM POWER SCHEMATIC

24V

GRN/YEL

TRAN

TERMINAL BOARD

C

X

THERMOSTAT

C G W2

W1

Y2

Y1 R

IFC

IGC

J2

J1

LED

COMPONENT ARRANGEMENT

YAC CONTROL 208/230V,460V,575V

BRN

TRAN

BRN

CONTROL BD

24V5

{

SEE

POWER

LABEL

1PH IFM ON 3PH

UNIT ONLY

TB

1PH IFM ONLY

3PH IFM

ONLY

CB

3.2 AMPS

ORN

BLU REDBRN

GRN

GRA

GRA

GRA

{{

YEL PNKREDGRA

BRN

{

FOR FIELD USE

RED

PNK

BRN

COM

24V

CONT

PMR

FIOP/ACCY

SAT

(FIOP/ACCY)

ECONOMI$ER

BLU

BLU

NOTES: 1. TERMINAL BOARD SCHEMATIC LAYOUT DOES NOT MATCH ACTUAL TERMINAL BOARD

TO SIMPLIFY CIRCUIT TRACES.

2. ENSURE DESIGNATED JUMPERS ON TERMINAL BOARD ARE CUT WHEN ADDING SMOKE

DETECTORS, PHASE LOSS RELAY, OCCUPANCY AND REMOTE SHUTDOWN.

3. IFC OCCURS FOR 208/230 AND 460 VOLT UNIT WITH 3 PHASE INDOOR FAN

MOTOR,

AND ALL 575 VOLT WITHOUT DIRECT DRIVE INDOOR FAN MOTOR.

DDC OPTIONS

ONLY

DDC

OPTIONS

ONLY

CAP1

PMR

ACCESSORY

IFM/OL (3PH IFM)

RED

RED

RED

ORN

BLUYEL

7

12

11 9514328

106

PL6-R

MOTOR

(FIOP/

ACCY)

2-POS

DAMPER

BLK

RED

BLK

RED

X

CLO

FIOP/ACCY

LOGIC

1 2 3

WHT

BRN

GRA

BLK

BLK

BRN

WHT

GRA

NOT REQ'D W/CLO

BRN

IFC (SEE NOTE #3)

IDMR

VIO

BRN

575V ONLY

BRN

575V ONLY

BLK

VIO

VIO

GRA

BRN

THRU STANDOFF

GROUNDED

CR

BR

IGC HS

LS

13

BLU

BLU

RS

13

GVR

CR

BRL1

BM

RT

CCM

12

3

J1FAN

LOGIC

SAFETY

LOGIC

HV

TRAN

GVR

J2 W

IFO G R RS

RS

LS

LS

CS

CS

GV

YEL

GV

FS C

GRN/YEL

MGV

12

3

BLK

FLAME SENSORGRN/YEL

IYELBLK

ORN

WHT

RED

BRN

C

MGV

M M HC

TWO STAGE

GRA

SINGLE STAGE

PNK

ORN

BLU

BLU

RED

575V

ONLY

VIO (208,230V)

BLK (460)

FROM DD IFM

HARNESS 5 TON

CCHTS

CONNECTED

TO

COMMON

(PIN 4

CNTRL

BOARD HEADER)

460/575V ONLY

CCHR

TDR BD

3

RED

5 TON ONLY

5 TON

ONLY

IFM TDR

CONTROL

C10271

Fig. 87 -- 1--Stage Unit Wiring Diagram -- Control (208/230V, 460V, 575V 3 Phase)

48HC

Page 69: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

69

C10272

Fig. 88 -- 2--Stage Unit Wiring Diagram -- Control (208/230V, 460V, 575V Single Phase)

48HC

Page 70: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

70

C08578

Fig. 89 -- 2--Stage Typical Wiring Diagram

48HC

Page 71: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

71

PRE--START--UP

PERSONAL INJURY HAZARDFailure to follow this warning could result in personalinjury or death.1. Follow recognized safety practices and wear pro-tective goggles when checking or servicing refri-gerant system.

2. Do not operate compressor or provide any electricpower to unit unless compressor terminal cover isin place and secured.

3. Do not remove compressor terminal cover untilall electrical sources are disconnected.

4. Relieve all pressure from system before touchingor disturbing anything inside terminal box if refri-gerant leak is suspected around compressor ter-minals.

5. Never attempt to repair soldered connection whilerefrigerant system is under pressure.

6. Do not use torch to remove any component. Sys-tem contains oil and refrigerant under pressure.To remove a component, wear protective gogglesand proceed as follows:a. Shut off electrical power and then gas to unit.b. Recover refrigerant to relieve all pressure from

system using both high--pressure and lowpressure ports.

c. Cut component connection tubing with tubingcutter and remove component from unit.

d. Carefully unsweat remaining tubing stubswhen necessary. Oil can ignite when exposedto torch flame.

! WARNING

Proceed as follows to inspect and prepare the unit forinitial start--up:

1. Remove all access panels.2. Read and follow instructions on all WARNING,CAUTION, and INFORMATION labels attached to,or shipped with, unit.

3. Make the following inspections:a. Inspect for shipping and handling damages suchas broken lines, loose parts, or disconnectedwires, etc.

b. Inspect for oil at all refrigerant tubing connec-tions and on unit base. Detecting oil generallyindicates a refrigerant leak. Leak--test all refri-gerant tubing connections using electronic leakdetector, halide torch, or liquid--soap solution.

c. Inspect all field--wiring and factory--wiring con-nections. Be sure that connections are completedand tight. Be sure that wires are not in contactwith refrigerant tubing or sharp edges.

d. Inspect coil fins. If damaged during shipping andhandling, carefully straighten fins with a fincomb.

4. Verify the following conditions:a. Make sure that condenser--fan blade are correctlypositioned in fan orifice. See Condenser--FanAdjustment section for more details.

b. Make sure that air filter(s) is in place.c. Make sure that condensate drain trap is filledwith water to ensure proper drainage.

d. Make sure that all tools and miscellaneous looseparts have been removed.

START--UP, GENERAL

Unit Preparation

Make sure that unit has been installed in accordance withinstallation instructions and applicable codes.

Gas Piping

Check gas piping for leaks.

UNIT OPERATION AND SAFETY HAZARDFailure to follow this warning could result in personalinjury or death.

Disconnect gas piping from unit when leak testing atpressure greater than 1/2 psig. Pressures greater than1/2 psig will cause gas valve damage resulting inhazardous condition. If gas valve is subjected topressure greater than 1/2 psig, it must be replacedbefore use. When pressure testing field--supplied gaspiping at pressures of 1/2 psig or less, a unit connectedto such piping must be isolated by manually closingthe gas valve.

! WARNING

Return--Air Filters

Make sure correct filters are installed in unit (seeAppendix II -- Physical Data). Do not operate unit withoutreturn--air filters.

Outdoor--Air Inlet Screens

Outdoor--air inlet screen must be in place before operatingunit.

Compressor Mounting

Compressors are internally spring mounted. Do not loosenor remove compressor hold down bolts.

Internal Wiring

Check all electrical connections in unit control boxes.Tighten as required.

Refrigerant Service Ports

Each unit system has two 1/4” SAE flare (with checkvalves) service ports: one on the suction line, and one onthe compressor discharge line. Be sure that caps on theports are tight.

48HC

Page 72: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

72

Compressor Rotation

On 3--phase units with scroll compressors, it is importantto be certain compressor is rotating in the properdirection. To determine whether or not compressor isrotating in the proper direction:

1. Connect service gauges to suction and discharge pres-sure fittings.

2. Energize the compressor.3. The suction pressure should drop and the dischargepressure should rise, as is normal on any start--up.

If the suction pressure does not drop and the dischargepressure does not rise to normal levels:

4. Note that the evaporator fan is probably also rotatingin the wrong direction.

5. Turn off power to the unit and install lockout tag.6. Reverse any two of the unit power leads.7. Re--energize to the compressor. Check pressures.

The suction and discharge pressure levels should nowmove to their normal start--up levels.

NOTE: When the compressor is rotating in the wrongdirection, the unit will make an elevated level of noiseand will not provide cooling.

Cooling

Set space thermostat to OFF position. To start unit, turn onmain power supply. Set system selector switch at COOLposition and fan switch at AUTO. position. Adjustthermostat to a setting below room temperature.Compressor starts on closure of contactor.

Check unit charge. Refer to Refrigerant Charge section.

Reset thermostat at a position above room temperature.Compressor will shut off. Evaporator fan will shut offafter a 30--second delay.

To shut off unit, set system selector switch at OFFposition. Resetting thermostat at a position above roomtemperature shuts unit off temporarily until spacetemperature exceeds thermostat setting.

Main Burners

Main burners are factory set and should require noadjustment.

To check ignition of main burners and heating controls,move thermostat setpoint above room temperature andverify that the burners light and evaporator fan isenergized. Check heating effect, then lower the thermostatsetting below the room temperature and verify that theburners and evaporator fan turn off.

Refer to Tables 11 and 12 for the correct orifice to use athigh altitudes.

Heating1. Purge gas supply line of air by opening union aheadof the gas valve. If gas odor is detected, tighten unionand wait 5 minutes before proceeding.

2. Turn on electrical supply and manual gas valve.3. Set system switch selector at HEAT position and fanswitch at AUTO. or ON position. Set heating temper-ature lever above room temperature.

4. The induced--draft motor will start.5. After a call for heating, the main burners should lightwithin 5 seconds. If the burner does not light, thenthere is a 22--second delay before another 5--secondtry. If the burner still does not light, the time delay isrepeated. If the burner does not light within 15minutes, there is a lockout. To reset the control, breakthe 24 v power to W1.

6. The evaporator--fan motor will turn on 45 secondsafter burner ignition.

7. The evaporator--fan motor will turn off in 45 secondsafter the thermostat temperature is satisfied.

8. Adjust airflow to obtain a temperature rise within therange specified on the unit nameplate.

NOTE: The default value for the evaporator--fan motoron/off delay is 45 seconds. The Integrated Gas UnitController (IGC) modifies this value when abnormal limitswitch cycles occur. Based upon unit operating conditions,the on delay can be reduced to 0 seconds and the off delaycan be extended to 180 seconds. When one flash of theLED is observed, the evaporator--fan on/off delay hasbeen modified.

If the limit switch trips at the start of the heating cycleduring the evaporator on delay, the time period of the ondelay for the next cycle will be 5 seconds less than thetime at which the switch tripped. (Example: If the limitswitch trips at 30 seconds, the evaporator--fan on delay forthe next cycle will occur at 25 seconds.) To preventshort--cycling, a 5--second reduction will only occur if aminimum of 10 minutes has elapsed since the last call forheating.

The evaporator--fan off delay can also be modified. Oncethe call for heating has ended, there is a 10--minute periodduring which the modification can occur. If the limitswitch trips during this period, the evaporator--fan offdelay will increase by 15 seconds. A maximum of 9 tripscan occur, extending the evaporator--fan off delay to 180seconds.

To restore the original default value, reset the power to theunit.

To shut off unit, set system selector switch at OFFposition. Resetting heating selector lever below roomtemperature will temporarily shut unit off until spacetemperature falls below thermostat setting.

Ventilation (Continuous Fan)

Set fan and system selector switches at ON and OFFpositions, respectively. Evaporator fan operatescontinuously to provide constant air circulation. When theevaporator--fan selector switch is turned to the OFFposition, there is a 30--second delay before the fan turnsoff.

48HC

Page 73: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

73

START--UP, PREMIERLINK™CONTROLS

ELECTRICAL OPERATION HAZARDFailure to follow this warning could result in personalinjury or death.

The unit must be electrically grounded in accordancewith local codes and NEC ANSI/NFPA 70 (AmericanNational Standards Institute/National Fire ProtectionAssociation.)

! WARNING

Use the Carrier network communication software to startup and configure the PremierLink controller.

Changes can be made using the ComfortWORKSrsoftware, ComfortVIEWt software, Network ServiceTool, System Pilott device, or Touch Pilott device. TheSystem Pilot and Touch Pilot are portable interfacedevices that allow the user to change system set--up andsetpoints from a zone sensor or terminal control module.During start--up, the Carrier software can also be used toverify communication with PremierLink controller.

NOTE: All set--up and setpoint configurations are factoryset and field--adjustable.

For specific operating instructions, refer to the literatureprovided with user interface software.

Perform System Check--Out1. Check correctness and tightness of all power andcommunication connections.

2. At the unit, check fan and system controls for properoperation.

3. At the unit, check electrical system and connectionsof any optional electric reheat coil.

4. Check to be sure the area around the unit is clear ofconstruction dirt and debris.

5. Check that final filters are installed in the unit. Dustand debris can adversely affect system operation.

6. Verify that the PremierLink controls are properly con-nected to the CCN bus.

Initial Operation and Test

Perform the following procedure:

1. Apply 24 vac power to the control.2. Connect the service tool to the phone jack serviceport of the controller.

3. Using the Service Tool, upload the controller fromaddress 0, 31 at 9600 baud rate. The address may beset at this time. Make sure that Service Tool is con-nected to only one unit when changing the address.

Memory Reset

DIP switch 4 causes an E--squared memory reset tofactory defaults after the switch has been moved fromposition 0 to position 1 and the power has been restored.To enable the feature again, the switch must be put backto the 0 position and power must be restored; this preventssubsequent resets to factory defaults if the switch is left atposition 1.

To cause a reset of the non--volatile memory (to factorydefaults), turn the controller power off if it is on, move theswitch from position 1 to position 0, and then apply powerto the controller for a minimum of 5 seconds. At thispoint, no action occurs, but the controller is now ready forthe memory to reset. Remove power to the controlleragain and move the switch from position 0 to position 1.This time, when power is applied, the memory will resetto factory defaults. The controller address will return tobus 0 element 31, indicating that memory reset occurred.

Refer to Installation Instruction 33CS--58SI for fulldiscussion on configuring the PremierLink control system.

START--UP, RTU--MP CONTROLField Service Test, explained below, will assist in properstart--up. Configuration of unit parameters, schedulingoptions, and operation are also discussed in this section.

Field Service TestThe Field Service Test function can be used to verifyproper operation of compressors, heating stages, indoorfan, power exhaust fans, economizer, anddehumidification. Use of Field Service Test isrecommended at initial system start up and duringtroubleshooting. See Form 48--50H--T--2T, Appendix A forField Service Test Mode table.Field Service Test mode has the following changes fromnormal operation:S Outdoor air temperature limits for cooling circuits,economizer, and heating are ignored.

S Normal compressor time guards and other stagingdelays are ignored.

S The status of Alarms (except Fire and Safety chain) isignored but all alerts and alarms are still broadcasted onthe network.

Field Service Test can be turned ON/OFF at the unitdisplay or from the network. Once turned ON, otherentries may be made with the display or through thenetwork. To turn Field Service Test on, change the valueof Test Mode to ON, to turn Field Service Test off, changethe value of Test Mode to OFF.NOTE: Service Test mode is password protected whenaccessing from the display. Depending on the unit model,factory--installed options, and field--installed accessories,some of the Field Service Test functions may not apply.The independent outputs (IndpOutputs) submenu is usedto change output status for the supply fan, economizer,and Power Exhaust.

48HC

Page 74: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

74

These independent outputs can operate simultaneouslywith other Field Service Test modes. All outputs return tonormal operation when Field Service Test is turned off.The Cooling submenu is used to change output status forthe individual compressors and the dehumidification relay.Compressor starts are not staggered. The fans and heatingservice test outputs are reset to OFF for the coolingservice test. Indoor fans and outdoor fans are controllednormally to maintain proper unit operation. All normalcooling alarms and alerts are functional.NOTE: Circuit A is always operated with Circuit B dueto outdoor fan control on Circuit A. Always test Circuit Afirst, and leave it on to test other Circuits.The Heating submenu is used to change output status forthe individual heat stages, gas or electric. The fans andcooling service test outputs are reset to OFF for theheating service test. All normal heating alarms and alertsare functional.

ConfigurationThe RTU--MP controller configuration points affect theunit operation and/or control. Review and understand themeaning and purpose of each configuration point beforechanging it from the factory default value. The submenuscontaining configuration points are as follows: Unit,Cooling, Heating, Inputs, Economizer, IAQ, Clock--Set,and User Password (USERPW). Each configuration pointis described below under its according submenu. SeeForm 48--50H--T--2T, Appendix for display tables.

Unit

Start Delay

This refers to the time delay the unit will wait after powerup before it pursues any specific operation.

Factory Default = 5 secRange = 0--600 sec

Filter Service Hours

This refers to the timer set for the Dirty Filter Alarm.After the number of runtime hours set on this point isexceeded the corresponding alarm will be generated, andmust be manually cleared on the alarm reset screen afterthe maintenance has been completed. The timer will thenbegin counting its runtime again for the next maintenanceinterval.

Factory Default = 600 hrNOTE: Setting this configuration timer to 0, disables thealarm.

Supply Fan Service Hours

This refers to the timer set for the Supply Fan RuntimeAlarm. After the number of runtime hours set on this pointis exceeded the corresponding alarm will be generated,and must be manually cleared on the alarm reset screenafter the maintenance has been completed. The timer willthen begin counting its runtime again for the nextmaintenance interval.

Factory Default = 0 hr

NOTE: Setting this configuration timer to 0, disables thealarm.

Compressor1 Service Hours

This refers to the timer set for the Compressor 1 RuntimeAlarm. After the number of runtime hours set on this pointis exceeded the corresponding alarm will be generated,and must be manually cleared on the alarm reset screenafter the maintenance has been completed. The timer willthen begin counting its runtime again for the nextmaintenance interval.

Factory Default = 0 hrNOTE: Setting this configuration timer to 0, disables thealarm.

Compressor2 Service Hours

This refers to the timer set for the Compressor 2 RuntimeAlarm. After the number of hours set on this point isexceeded the corresponding alarm will be generated, andmust be manually cleared on the alarm rest screen afterthe maintenance has been completed. The timer will thenbegin counting its runtime again for the next maintenanceinterval

Factory Default = 0 hrNOTE: Setting this configuration timer to 0, disables thealarm.

Cooling

Number of Compressor Stages

This refers to the number of mechanical cooling stagesavailable on a specific unit. Set this point to “One Stage”if there is one compressor in the specific unit, set to “TwoStage” if there are two compressors in the unit, and set to“None” if economizer cooling ONLY is desired.

Factory Default = One Stage for 1 compressor unitsTwo Stage for 2 compressor units

Cooling/Econ SAT Low Setpt

The supply air temperature must remain above this valueto allow cooling with the economizer and/or compressors.There is 5_F plus and minus deadband to this point. If theSAT falls below this value during cooling, all compressorswill be staged off. The economizer will start to rampdown to minimum position when the SAT = thisconfiguration +5_F.

Factory Default = 50_FRange = 45--75_F

Cooling Lockout Temp

This defines the minimum outdoor air temperature thatcooling mode can be enabled and run. If the OAT fallsbelow this threshold during cooling, then compressorcooling will not be allowed.

Factory Default = 45_FRange = 0--65_F

48HC

Page 75: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

75

Heating

Heating SAT High Setpt

The supply air temperature must remain below this valueto allow heating. There is 5_F plus and minus deadband tothis point. If the SAT rises above this value during heatingthe heat stages will begin to decrease until the SAT hasdropped below this value.

Factory Default = 120_FRange = 95--150_F

Heating Lockout Temp

This defines the maximum outdoor air temperature thatheating mode can be enabled and run. If the OAT risesabove this threshold during heating, then heating will notbe allowed.

Factory Default = 65_FRange = 49--95_F

Inputs

NOTE: For installation of inputs and field installedaccessories, refer to the appropriate sections.

Input 3

This input is a discrete input and can be configured to beone of five different inputs: No Function, CompressorSafety, Fan Status, Filter Status, or Remote Occupancy.This input can also be configured to be either NormallyOpen (N/O) or Normally Closed (N/C). Input 3 is factorywired to pin J1--2. Field accessories get wired to itsparallel pin J5--5. Do not connect inputs to both locations,one function per input.

Factory Default = Compressor Safety and N/ONOTE: Compressor Safety input comes from the CLOboard. J1--2 is always factory wired to TB1--8 (X) terminalon the unit. If the unit has a CLO board, do not configureinput 3 for anything but Compressor Safety.

Input 5

This input is a discrete input and can be configured to beone of five different inputs: No Function, Fire Shutdown,Fan Status, Filter Status, or Remote Occupancy. Thisinput can also be configured to be either Normally Open(N/O) or Normally Closed (N/C). Input 5 is factory wiredto pin J1--10. Field accessories get wired to its parallel pinJ5--3. Do not connect inputs to both locations, onefunction per input.

Factory Default = Fire Shutdown and N/CNOTE: Fire Shutdown input comes from TB4--7. J1--10is always factory wired to TB4--7. Only change input 5sfunction if absolutely needed.

Input 8

This input is a discrete input and can be configured to beone of five different inputs: No Function, EnthalpySwitch, Fan Status, Filter Status, or Remote Occupancy.This input can also be configured to be either NormallyOpen (N/O) or Normally Closed (N/C). Input 8 is factorywired to pin J2--6.

Field accessories get wired to its parallel pin J5--1. Do notconnect inputs to both locations, one function per input.

Factory Default = No Function and N/O

Input 9

This input is a discrete input and can be configured to beone of five different inputs: No Function, Humidistat, FanStatus, Filter Status, or Remote Occupancy. This input canalso be configured to be either Normally Open (N/O) orNormally Closed (N/C). Input 9 is factory and field wiredto pin J5--7. Do not connect inputs to both locations, onefunction per input.

Factory Default = Humidistat and N/O

Space Sensor Type

This tells the controller what type of space sensor isinstalled to run the unit. The three types that can be usedare the T55 space sensor, the T56 space sensor, or the RSspace sensor.

Factory Default = T55 Type

Input 1 Function

This input is an analog input and can be configured to beone of five different inputs: No Sensor, IAQ Sensor, OAQSensor, Space RH Sensor, or Outdoor RH Sensor. Input 1is wired to pin J4--5.

Factory Default = No Sensor

Input 2 Function

This input is an analog input and can be configured to beone of five different inputs: No Sensor, IAQ Sensor, OAQSensor, Space RH Sensor, or Outdoor RH Sensor. Input 2is wired to pin J4--2.

Factory Default = No Sensor

Setpoint Slider Range

This sets the slider range of the space sensor (with thisbuilt in function). The slider is used to offset the currentcontrol setpoint.

Factory Default = 5 n_FRange = 0--15 n_F

T55/56 Override Duration

This sets the occupancy override duration when theoverride button is pushed on the space sensor.

Factory Default = 1 hrRange = 0--24 hr

IAQ Low Reference @ 4mA

This is used when an IAQ sensor is installed on Input 1 or2. This value is displayed and used when 4mA is seen atthe input.

Factory Default = 0 PPMRange = 0--400 PPM

IAQ High Reference @ 20mA

This is used when an IAQ sensor is installed on Input 1 or2. This value is displayed and used when 20mA is seen atthe input.

Factory Default = 2000 PPMRange = 0--5000 PPM

48HC

Page 76: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

76

NOTE: IAQ low Reference @ 4mA and IAQ HighReference @ 20mA are used to set the linear curve of mAvs. PPM.

OAQ Low Reference @ 4mA

This is used when an OAQ sensor is installed on Input 1or 2. This value is displayed and used when 4mA is seenat the input.

Factory Default = 0 PPMRange = 0--400 PPM

OAQ High Reference @ 20mA

This is used when an OAQ sensor is installed on Input 1or 2. This value is displayed and used when 20mA is seenat the input.

Factory Default = 2000 PPMRange = 0--5000 PPM

NOTE: OAQ low Reference @ 4mA and OAQ HighReference @ 20mA are used to set the linear curve of mAvs. PPM.

Economizer

Economizer Exists

This point tells the controller if there is an economizerinstalled on the unit.

Factory Default = NO if no economizerYES if there is an economizer installed

Economizer Minimum Position

This defines the lowest economizer position when theindoor fan is running and the building is occupied.

Factory Default = 20%Range = 0--100 %

Economizer High OAT Lockout

If the outdoor air temperature rises above this value,economizer cooling will be disabled and dampers willreturn and stay at minimum position.

Factory Default = 75_FRange = 55--80_F

Power Exhaust Setpt

When the economizer damper position opens above thispoint the power exhaust operation will begin. When thedamper position falls 10% below the setpoint, the powerexhaust will shutdown.

Factory Default = 50%Range = 20--90 %

NOTE: This point is only used when Continuous OccExhaust = NO

Continuous Occ Exhaust

This point tells the controller when to run the powerexhaust if equipped on the unit. If set to YES, the powerexhaust will be on all the time when in occupied modeand will be off when in unoccupied mode. If set to NO thepower exhaust will be controlled by the Power ExhaustSetpoint.

Factory Default = NO

IAQ

Max Differential CO2 Setpt

If the difference between indoor an outdoor air qualitybecomes greater then this value the damper position willstay at the IAQ Greatest Min Dmpr Pos. configurationpoint

Factory Default = 650 PPMRange = 300--950 PPM

IAQ Greatest Min Dmpr Pos.

This is the greatest minimum position the economizer willopen to while trying to control the indoor air quality, CO2differential.

Factory Default = 50% openRange = 10--60% open

Clockset

This submenu screen allows you to set the date and timemanually. The Daylight Savings Time (DST) can also bechanged here. The date and time is automatically set whenever software is downloaded. The clock is a 24 hour clockand not am/pm. The time should be verified (and maybechanged) according to unit location and time zone.

Factory Default = Eastern Standard Time

USERPW

This submenu screen allows you to change the userpassword to a four number password of choice. The Userpassword change screen is only accessible with theAdministrator Password (1111). The ADMIN passwordwill always override the user password.

OPERATING SEQUENCES

Base Unit Controls

Cooling, Units Without Economizer

When thermostat calls for cooling, terminals G and Y1 areenergized. The indoor--fan contactor (IFC) andcompressor contactor are energized and indoor--fan motor,compressor, and outdoor fan starts. The outdoor fan motorruns continuously while unit is cooling.

Heating, Units Without Economizer

When the thermostat calls for heating, terminal W1 isenergized. To prevent thermostat short--cycling, the unit islocked into the Heating mode for at least 1 minute whenW1 is energized. The induced--draft motor is energizedand the burner ignition sequence begins. The indoor(evaporator) fan motor (IFM) is energized 45 secondsafter a flame is ignited. On units equipped for two stagesof heat, when additional heat is needed, W2 is energizedand the high--fire solenoid on the main gas valve (MGV)is energized. When the thermostat is satisfied and W1 isdeenergized, the IFM stops after a 45--second time offdelay.

48HC

Page 77: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

77

Cooling, Unit With EconoMi$er IV

For Occupied mode operation of EconoMi$er IV, theremust be a 24--v signal at terminals TR and N (providedthrough PL6--3 from the unit’s IFC coil). Removing thesignal at N places the EconoMi$er IV control inUnoccupied mode.

During Occupied mode operation, indoor fan operationwill be accompanied by economizer dampers moving toMinimum Position setpoint for ventilation. If indoor fan isoff, dampers will close. During Unoccupied modeoperation, dampers will remain closed unless a Cooling(by free cooling) or DCV demand is received.

Integrated EconoMi$er IV operation on 48HC singlecompressor model requires a 2--stage thermostat (Y1 andY2 switches).

When free cooling using outside air is not available, theunit cooling sequence will be controlled directly by thespace thermostat as described above as Cooling, WithoutEconomizer. Outside air damper position will be closed orMinimum Position as determined by occupancy mode andfan signal.

When free cooling is available as determined by theappropriate changeover command (dry bulb, outdoorenthalpy, differential dry bulb or differential enthalpy), acall for cooling (Y1 closes at the thermostat) will causethe economizer control to modulate the dampers open andclosed to maintain the unit supply air temperature at 50 to55_F. Compressor will not run.

During free cooling operation, a supply air temperature(SAT) above 50_F will cause the dampers to modulatebetween Minimum Position setpoint and 100% open. WithSAT from 50_F to 45_F, the dampers will maintain at theMinimum Position setting. With SAT below 45_F, theoutside air dampers will be closed. When SAT rises to48_F, the dampers will re--open to Minimum Positionsetting.

Should 100% outside air not be capable of satisfying thespace temperature, space temperature will rise until Y2 isclosed. The economizer control will call for compressoroperation. Dampers will modulate to maintain SAT at 50to 55_F concurrent with compressor operation. The LowAmbient Lockout Thermostat will block compressoroperation with economizer operation below 42_F outsideair temperature.

When space temperature demand is satisfied (thermostatY1 opens), the dampers will return to Minimum Damperposition if indoor fan is running or fully closed if fan isoff.

If accessory power exhaust is installed, the power exhaustfan motors will be energized by the economizer control asthe dampers open above the PE--On setpoint and will bede--energized as the dampers close below the PE--Onsetpoint.

Damper movement from full closed to full open (or viceversa) will take between 1--1/2 and 2--1/2 minutes.

Heating With EconoMi$er IV

During Occupied mode operation, indoor fan operationwill be accompanied by economizer dampers moving toMinimum Position setpoint for ventilation. If indoor fan isoff, dampers will close. During Unoccupied modeoperation, dampers will remain closed unless a DCVdemand is received.

When the room temperature calls for heat (W1 closes), theheating controls are energized as described in Heating,Unit Without Economizer above.

PremierLink™ Control

THERMOSTAT MODE — If the PremierLink controlleris configured for Thermostat mode (TSTAT), it willcontrol only to the thermostat inputs on J4. These inputscan be overridden through CCN communication via theCV_TSTAT points display table. When in this mode, thefire safety shutdown (FSD) input cannot be used, so anyfire/life safety shutdown must be physically wired todisable the 24 vac control circuit to the unit.

Indoor Fan — The indoor fan output will be energizedwhenever there is 24 vac present on the G input. Theindoor fan will be turned on without any delay and theeconomizer damper will open to its minimum position ifthe unit has a damper connected to the controller. Thiswill also occur if the PremierLink controller has beenconfigured for electric heat or heat pump operation.

Cooling — For cooling operation, there must be 24 vacpresent on G. When G is active, the PremierLinkcontroller will then determine if outdoor conditions aresuitable for economizer cooling when an economizerdamper is available. A valid OAT, SPT (CCN spacetemperature) and SAT (supply air temperature) sensorMUST be installed for proper economizer operation. Itrecommended that an outdoor or differential enthalpysensor also be installed. If one is not present, then ajumper is needed on the ENTH input on J4, which willindicate that the enthalpy will always be low. Economizeroperation will be based only on outdoor air dry bulbtemperature. The conditions are suitable when: enthalpy islow, OAT is less than OATL High Lockout for TSTAT,and OAT is less than OATMAX, the high setpoint for freecooling. The default for OATL is 65_F. The default forOATMAX is 75_F.

When all of the above conditions are satisfied and all therequired sensors are installed, the PremierLink controllerwill use the economizer for cooling. One of three differentcontrol routines will be used depending on thetemperature of the outside air. The routines use a PID loopto control the SAT to a supply air setpoint (SASP) basedon the error from setpoint (SASPSAT). The SASP isdetermined by the routine.

If an economizer is not available or the conditions are notmet for the following economizer routines below, thecompressors 1 and 2 will be cycled based on Y1 and Y2inputs respectively.

48HC

Page 78: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

78

Any time the compressors are running, the PremierLink™controller will lock out the compressors if the SATbecomes too low. These user configurable settings arefound in the SERVICE configuration table:

Compressor 1 Lockout at SAT < SATLO1 (50 to 65_F)(default is 55_F)

Compressor 2 Lockout at SAT < SATLO2 (45 to 55_F)(default is 50_F)

After a compressor is locked out, it may be started againafter a normal time--guard period and the supply--airtemperature has increased at least 8_F above the lockoutsetpoint.

Routine No. 1: If the OAT ≤ DXLOCK (OAT DX lockouttemperature) and DX Cooling Lockout is enabled whenY1 input is energized, the economizer will be modulatedto maintain SAT at the Supply Air Setpoint (SASP) =SATLO1 + 3_F (Supply Air Low Temp lockout forcompressor 1). When Y2 is energized, the economizerwill be modulated to control to a lower SASP = SATLO2+ 3_F (Supply Air Low Temp lockout for compressor no.2). Mechanical cooling is locked out and will not beenergized.

Routine No. 2: If DXLOCK (or DX Cooling Lockout isdisabled) < OAT ≤ 68_F when Y1 input is energized, theeconomizer will be modulated to maintain SAT at SASP =SATLO1 + 3_F. If the SAT > SASP + 5_F and theeconomizer position > 85% then the economizer willclose the to minimum position for three minutes or untilthe SAT > 68_F. The economizer integrator will then bereset and begin modulating to maintain the SASP afterstage one has been energized for 90 seconds.

When Y2 is energized, the economizer will be modulatedto control to a lower supply air setpoint SASP= SATLO2+ 3_F If the SAT > SASP + 5_F it will close theeconomizer to minimum position for 3 minutes, reset theintegrator for the economizer, then start modulating theeconomizer to maintain the SASP after the stage two hasbeen on for 90 seconds. This provides protection for thecompressor against flooded starts and allow refrigerantflow to stabilize before modulating the economizer again.By using return air across the evaporator coil just after thecompressor has started allows for increased refrigerantflow rates providing better oil return of any oil washed outduring compressor start--up.

Routine No. 3: If the OAT > 68_F and the enthalpy is lowand the OAT < SPT then the economizer will open to100% and compressors 1 and 2 will be cycled based onY1 and Y2 inputs respectively. If any of these conditionsare not met the economizer will go to minimum position.

If there is no call for heating or cooling, the economizer,if available, will maintain the SASP at 70_F.

Heating — For gas or electric heat, HS1 and HS2 outputswill follow W1 and W2 inputs respectively. The fan willalso be turned on if it is configured for electric heat.

Heating may also be energized when an IAQ sensorinstalled and has overridden the minimum economizerdamper position. If the OAT < 55_F and an IAQ sensor isinstalled and the IAQ minimum position > minimumdamper position causing the SAT to decrease below theSPT -- 10_F, then the heat stages will be cycled to temperthe SAT to maintain a temperature between the SPT andthe SPT + 10_F.

Auxiliary Relay configured for Exhaust Fan — If theAuxiliary Relay is configured for exhaust fan (AUXOUT= 1) in the CONFIG configuration table and ContinuousPower Exhaust (MODPE) is enable in the SERVICEconfiguration table then the output (HS3) will beenergized whenever the G input is on. If the MODPE isdisabled then output will be energized based on the PowerExhaust Setpoint (PES) in the SETPOINT table.

Indoor Air Quality — If the optional indoor air quality(IAQI) sensor is installed, the PremierLink controller willmaintain indoor air quality within the space at theuser--configured differential setpoint (IAQD) in theCONFIG configuration table. The setpoint is thedifference between the IAQI and an optional outdoor airquality sensor (OAQ). If the OAQ is not present then afixed value of 400 ppm is used. The actual space IAQsetpoint (IAQS) is calculated as follows:

IAQS = IAQD + OAQ (OAQ = 400 ppm if not present)

As air quality within the space changes, the minimumposition of the economizer damper will be changed alsothus allowing more or less outdoor air into the spacedepending on the relationship of the IAQI to the IAQS.The IAQ algorithm runs every 30 seconds and calculatesIAQ minimum position value using a PID loop on theIAQI deviation from the IAQS. The IAQ minimumposition is then compared against the user configuredminimum position (MDP) and the greatest value becomesthe final minimum damper position (IQMP). If thecalculated IAQ Minimum Position is greater than the IAQmaximum damper position (IAQMAXP) decision in theSERVICE configuration table, then it will be clamped toIAQMAXP value.

If IAQ is configured for low priority, the positioning ofthe economizer damper can be overridden by comfortrequirements. If the SAT < SASP --8_F and both stages ofheat are on for more then 4 minutes or the SAT > SASP +5_F and both stages of cooling on for more then 4 minutesthen the IAQ minimum damper position will become 0and the IQMP = MDP. IAQ mode will resume when theSAT > SASP --8_F in heating or the SAT < SASP + 5_F incooling.

If the PremierLink controller is configured for 1 stage ofheat and cool or is only using a single stage thermostatinput, this function will not work as it requires the bothY1 and Y2 or W1 and W2 inputs to be active. In thisapplication, it is recommended that the user configureIAQ priority for high.

48HC

Page 79: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

79

If IAQ is configured for high priority and the OAT < 55_Fand the SAT < (SPT --10_F), the algorithm will enable theheat stages to maintain the SAT between the SPT and theSPT + 10_F.

CCN SENSOR MODE — When the PremierLink™controller is configured for CCN control, it will controlthe compressor, economizer and heating outputs based itsown space temperature input and setpoints or thosereceived from Linkage. An optional CO2 IAQ sensormounted in the space or received through communicationscan also influence the economizer and heating outputs.The PremierLink controller does not have a hardwareclock so it must have another device on the CCNcommunication bus broadcasting time. The controller willmaintain its own time once it has received time as long asit has power and will send a request for time once aminute until it receives time when it has lost power andpower is restored. The controller will control tounoccupied setpoints until it has received a valid time.The controller must have valid time in order to performany broadcast function, follow an occupancy schedule,perform IAQ pre--occupancy purge and many otherfunctions as well. The following sections describe theoperation for the functions of the PremierLink controller.

Indoor Fan — The indoor fan will be turned on wheneverany one of the following conditions are met:

S If the PremierLink controller is in the occupied modeand ASHRAE 90.1 Supply Fan is configured for Yes inthe CONFIG table. This will be determined by its owninternal occupancy schedule if it is programmed tofollow its local schedule or broadcast its local scheduleas a global schedule, or following a global schedulebroadcast by another device.

S If PremierLink controller is in the occupied mode andASHRAE 90.1 Supply Fan is configured for No andthere is a heat or cool demand (fan auto mode)

S If the PremierLink controller is in the occupied modeand ASHRAE 90.1 Supply Fan is configured for Yeswhen Linkage is active and the Linkage Coordinatordevice is sending an occupied mode flag

S When Temperature Compensated Start is active

S When Free Cool is active

S When Pre--Occupancy Purge is active

S Whenever there is a demand for cooling or heating inthe unoccupied mode

S Whenever the Remote Contact input is configured forRemote Contact (RC_DC=1 in SERVICE table) and itis closed or the point is forced Closed viacommunications in the STATUS01 points display table(remote contact closed = occupied, remote contact open= unoccupied)

S Whenever the H3_EX_RV point is configured forDehumidification (AUXOUT=5 in CONFIG table) andit is in the unoccupied mode and the indoor RH exceedsthe unoccupied humidity setpoint

S Whenever the Supply Fan Relay point is forced On inthe STATUS01 points display table

The fan will also continue to run as long as compressorsare on when transitioning from occupied to unoccupiedwith the exception of Fire Shutdown mode. If the FireShutdown input point is closed or forced in theSTATUS01 points display table, the fan will be shutdownimmediately regardless of the occupancy state or demand.

The PremierLink controller has an optional Supply FanStatus input to provide proof of airflow. If this is enabled,the point will look for a contact closure whenever theSupply Fan Relay is on. If the input is not enabled, then itwill always be the same state as the Supply Fan Relay.The cooling, economizer and heating routines will use thisinput point for fan status.

Cooling — The compressors are controlled by the CoolingControl Loop that is used to calculate the desired SATneeded to satisfy the space. It will compare the SPT to theOccupied Cool Setpoint (OCSP) + the T56 slider offset(STO) when occupied and the Unoccupied Cool Setpoint(UCSP + Unoccupied Cooling Deadband) if unoccupiedto calculate a Cooling Submaster Reference (CCSR) thatis then used by the staging algorithm (Cooling submasterloop) to calculate the required number of cooling stages.The economizer, if available, will be used as the firststage of cooling in addition to the compressors. This loopruns every minute. The following conditions must be metin order for this algorithm to run:

S indoor fan has been ON for at least 30 seconds

S heat mode is not active and the time guard betweenmodes equals zero.

S mode is occupied or the Temperature CompensatedStart or Cool mode is active

S SPT reading is available and > (OCSP + STO)

S If mode is unoccupied and the SPT > (UCSP +Unoccupied Cooling Deadband). The indoor fan will beturned on by the staging algorithm.

S OAT > DXLOCK or OAT DX Lockout is disabled

If all of the above conditions are met, the CCSR will becalculated, otherwise it is set to its maximum value andDX stages is set to 0. If only the last condition is not trueand an economizer is available, it will be used to cool thespace.

The submaster loop uses the CCSR compared to the actualSAT to determine the required number of capacity stagesto satisfy the load. There is a programmable minimuminternal time delay of 3 to 5 minutes on and 2 to 5 minutesoff for the compressors to prevent short cycling. There isalso a 3--minute time delay before bringing on the secondstage compressor.

48HC

Page 80: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

80

If the PremierLink™ controller is configured for HeatPump and AUXOUT is configured for Reversing ValveCool, the H3_EX_RV output will energize 2 seconds afterthe first compressor is energized and stay energized untilthere is a demand for heat. If AUXOUT is configured forReversing Valve Heat, then the H3_EX_RV contact willbe deenergized when there is a demand for cooling. Aninternal 5 to 10--minute user--programmable time guardbetween modes prevents rapid cycling between modeswhen used in a single zone application. The Time Guardis lowered to 3 minutes when Linkage is active to allowthe 3Vt linkage coordinator to have better control of thePremierLink controller when used as the air source for the3V control system.

Table 29 indicates the number of stages available. Thestaging algorithm looks at the number of stages availablebased the number of cool stages configured in theSERVICE configuration table. The algorithm will skip theeconomizer if it is not available and turn on a compressor.

Table 29 – Available Cooling StagesNUMBER OFSTAGES 0 1

(ECONOMIZER*) 2 3

Compressor 1 Off Off On OnCompressor 2 Off Off Off On* If conditions are suitable for economizer operation.

Any time the compressors are running, the PremierLinkcontroller will lockout the compressors if the SATbecomes too low. These user configurable settings arefound in the SERVICE configuration table:

Compressor 1 Lockout at SAT < SATLO1 (50 to 65_F)(default is 55_F)

Compressor 2 Lockout at SAT < SATLO2 (45 to 55_F)(default is 50_F)

After a compressor is locked out, it may be started againafter a normal time--guard period and the supply airtemperature has increased at least 8_F above the lockoutsetpoint.

Dehumidification — The PremierLink controller willprovide occupied and unoccupied dehumidificationcontrol when AUXOUT = 5 in the CONFIG table and isinstalled on HVAC units that are equipped with additionalcontrols and accessories to accomplish this function. Thisfunction also requires a space relative humidity sensor beinstalled on the OAQ/IRH input.

When in the occupied mode and the indoor relativehumidity is greater then the Occupied High Humiditysetpoint, then the H3_EX_RV output point will beenergized. When in the unoccupied mode and indoorrelative humidity is greater then the Unoccupied HighHumidity setpoint, then the H3_EX_RV output point andsupply fan output will be energized. There is a fixed 5%hysteresis that the indoor relative humidity must dropbelow the active setpoint to end the dehumidificationmode and deenergize the H3_EX_RV output. If thePremierLink controller is in the unoccupied mode, thenthe fan relay will deenergize if there is no other moderequiring to the fan to be on.

This function will not energize mechanical cooling as aresult of the indoor relative humidity exceeding eithersetpoint.

A high humidity alarm will be generated if the indoorrelative humidity exceeds the high humidity setpoint bythe amount configured in the Control Humidity Hysteresisin the ALARMS table for 20 minutes. The alarm willreturn to normal when the indoor relative humidity drops3% below the active humidity setpoint.

Economizer — The economizer dampers are used toprovide free cooling and indoor air quality if optional CO2sensor is installed and when the outside conditions aresuitable. Temperature control is accomplished bycontrolling the SAT to a certain level determined by theEconomizer PID Loop by calculating a submasterreference (ECONSR) value. This algorithm will calculatethe submaster reference temperature (ECONSR) based onOAT and enthalpy conditions and cooling requirements.The ECONSR value is then passed to the EconomizerSubmaster Loop, which will modulate dampers tomaintain SAT at ECONSR level.

The following conditions are required to determine ifeconomizer cooling is possible:

S Indoor fan has been on for at least 30 seconds

S Enthalpy is low

S SAT reading is available

S OAT reading is available

S SPT reading is available

S OAT ≤ SPT

S OAT < OATMAX (OATMAX default is 75_F)

S Economizer position is NOT forced

If any of the above conditions are not met, the ECONSRwill be set to its MAX limit of 120_F and the damper willgo to its configured minimum position. The minimumdamper position can be overridden by the IAQ routinedescribed later in this section.

The calculation for ECONSR is as follows:

ECONSR = PID function on (setpoint -- SPT), where:setpoint = ((OCSP+STO) + (OHSP+STO))/2 whenNTLO (Unoccupied Free Cool OAT Lockout) < OAT <68_Fsetpoint = (OCSP+STO) -- 1 when OAT ≤ NTLOsetpoint = (OHSP+STO) + 1 when OAT ≥ 68_F

The actual damper position (ECONPOS) is the result ofthe following calculation. Values represented in the rightside of the equation can be found in the SERVICEconfiguration table descriptions in this manual. Note thatthat the OAT is taken into consideration to avoid largechanges in damper position when the OAT is cold:

ECONPOS = SubGain x (ECONSR--SAT) + CTRVALwhere SubGain = (OAT -- TEMPBAND) / (ESG + 1)

48HC

Page 81: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

81

If the OAT < DXLOCK (DX Cool Lockout setpoint) thenthe damper will be modulated to maintain the SAT at theECONSR value.

If the OAT is between DXLOCK and 68_F (DXLOCK <OAT < 68_F) and additional cooling is required, theeconomizer will close the to minimum position for threeminutes, the economizer integrator will then be reset to 0and begin modulating to maintain the SASP after the stagehas been energized for about 90 seconds. This will allowthe economizer to calculate a new ECONSR that takesinto account the cooling effect that has just been turned onand not return to the value require before the cooling wasadded. This will prevent the economizer from causingpremature off cycles of compressors while maintaining thelow SAT temperature setpoint for the number of stagesactive. In addition to preventing compressor short cycling,by using return air across the evaporator coil just after thecompressor has started allows for increased refrigerantflow rates providing for better oil return of any oil washedout during compressor start--up.

If the OAT > 68_F and OAT < SPT and the number of DXstages requested is > 0 by the staging algorithm, thenECONSR is set to its minimum value 48_F and thedamper will go to 100% open.

If the Auxiliary Relay is configured for exhaust fan(AUXOUT = 1) in the CONFIG configuration table andContinuous Power Exhaust (MODPE) is Enable in theSERVICE configuration table, then the AUXO output(HS3) will be energized whenever the PremierLink™controller is in the occupied mode. If the MODPE isdisabled then AUXO output will be energized based onthe Power Exhaust Setpoint (PES) in the SETPOINTtable.

Heating — The heat stages are controlled by the HeatingControl Loop, which is used to calculate the desired SATneeded to satisfy the space. It will compare the SPT to theOccupied Heat Setpoint (OHSP) + the T56 slider offset(STO) when occupied and the Unoccupied Heat Setpoint(UHSP -- Unoccupied Heating Deadband) if unoccupied tocalculate a Staged Heat Submaster Reference (SHSR).The heat staging algorithm compares the SHSR to theactual SAT to calculate the required number of heatingstages to satisfy the load. This loop runs every 40 seconds.The following conditions must be met in order for thisalgorithm to run:

S Indoor fan has been ON for at least 30 seconds.

S Cool mode is not active and the time guard betweenmodes equals zero.

S Mode is occupied or the Temperature CompensatedStart or Heat mode is active.

S SPT reading is available and < (OHSP + STO).

S If it is unoccupied and the SPT < (UHSP -- UnoccupiedHeating Deadband). The indoor fan will be turn on bythe staging algorithm.

When all of the above conditions are met, the SHSR iscalculated and up to 3 stages of heat will turned on and offto satisfy to maintain the SAT = SHSR. If any of theabove conditions are not met, the SHSR is set to itsminimum value of 35_F.

The Staged Heat Submaster Reference (SHSR) iscalculated as follows:

SHSR = Heating PID function on (error) where error =(OHSP + STO) -- Space Temperature

The Maximum SHSR is determined by the SATHIconfiguration. If the supply--air temperature exceeds theSATHI configuration value, then the heat stages will turnoff. Heat staging will resume after a delay to allow thesupply--air temperature to drop below the SATHI value.

The maximum number of stages available is dependent onthe type of heat and the number of stages programmed inthe CONFIG and SERVICE configuration tables. Stagingwill occur as follows for gas electric units, Carrier heatpumps with a defrost board, or cooling units with electricheat:

For Heating PID STAGES = 2HEAT STAGES = 1 (50% capacity) -- energize HS1.HEAT STAGES = 2 (100% capacity) -- energize HS2.

For Heating PID STAGES = 3 and AUXOUT = HS3HEAT STAGES = 1 (33% capacity if) -- energize HS1HEAT STAGES = 2 (66% capacity) -- energize HS2HEAT STAGES = 3 (100% capacity) -- energize HS3

Staging will occur as follows For heat pump units withAUXOUT configured as reversing valve:

For Heating PID STAGES = 2 and AUXOUT = ReversingValve Heat (the H3_EX_RV output will stay energizeduntil there is a cool demand) HEAT STAGES = 1 (50%capacity) shall energize CMP1, CMP2, RVS.

HEAT STAGES = 2 (100% capacity) shall energize HS1and HS2.

Heating PID STAGES = 3 and AUXOUT = ReversingValve Heat (the H3_EX_RV output will stay energizeduntil there is a cool demand)

HEAT STAGES = 1 (33% capacity if) shall energizeCMP1, CMP2, RVS

HEAT STAGES = 2 (66% capacity) shall energize HS1

HEAT STAGES = 3 (100% capacity) shall energize HS248HC

Page 82: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

82

If AUXOUT is configured for Reversing Valve Cool, thenthe H3_EX_RV contact will be deenergized when there isa demand for heating. The heat stages will be cycled totemper the SAT so that it will be between the SPT and theSPT + 10_F (SPT < SAT < (SPT + 10_F)) if:

S the number of heat stages calculated is zero

S the OAT < 55_F

S an IAQ sensor is installed

S the IAQ Minimum Damper Position > minimumdamper position

S and the SAT < SPT --10_F.

There is also a SAT tempering routine that will act as SATlow limit safety to prevent the SAT from becoming toocold should the economizer fail to close. One stage ofheating will be energized if it is not in the Cooling or FreeCooling mode and the OAT is below 55_F and the SAT isbelow 40_F. It will deenergize when the SAT > (SPT +10_F).

Indoor Air Quality — If the optional indoor air quality(IAQI) sensor is installed, the PremierLink™ controllerwill maintain indoor air quality within the space at theuser configured differential setpoint (IAQD) in theCONFIG configuration table. The setpoint is thedifference between the IAQI and an optional outdoor airquality sensor (OAQ). If the OAQ is not present then afixed value of 400 ppm is used. The actual space IAQsetpoint (IAQS) is calculated as follows:

IAQS = IAQD + OAQ (OAQ = 400 ppm if not present)

As air quality within the space changes, the minimumposition of the economizer damper will be changed alsothus allowing more or less outdoor air into the spacedepending on the relationship of the IAQI to the IAQS.The IAQ algorithm runs every 30 seconds and calculatesIAQ minimum position value using a PID loop on theIAQI deviation from the IAQS. The IAQ minimumposition is then compared against the user configuredminimum position (MDP) and the greatest value becomesthe final minimum damper position (IQMP). If thecalculated IAQ minimum position is greater than the IAQmaximum damper position (IAQMAXP) decision in theSERVICE configuration table, then it will be clamped toIAQMAXP value.

If IAQ is configured for low priority, the positioning ofthe economizer damper can be overridden by comfortrequirements. If the SPT > OCSP + 2.5 or the SPT <OHSP -- 2.5 then IAQ minimum position becomes 0 andthe IQMP = MDP. The IAQ mode will resume when theSPT ≤ OCSP + 1.0 and SPT ≥ OHSP -- 1.0.

If IAQ is configured for high priority and the OAT < 55_Fand the SAT < (SPT -- 10_F), the algorithm will enable theheat stages to maintain the SAT between the SPT and theSPT + 10_F.

IAQ Pre--Occupancy Purge — This function is designed topurge the space of airborne contaminants that may haveaccumulated 2 hours prior to the beginning of the nextoccupied period.

The maximum damper position that will be used istemperature compensated for cold whether conditions andcan be pre--empted by Temperature Compensated Startfunction. For pre--occupancy to occur, the followingconditions must be met:

S IAQ Pre--Occupancy Purge option is enabled in theCONFIG configuration table

S Unit is in the unoccupied state

S Current Time is valid

S Next Occupied Time is valid

S Time is within 2 hours of next Occupied period

S Time is within Purge Duration (user--defined 5 to 60minutes in the CONFIG configuration table)

S OAT Reading is available

If all of the above conditions are met, the economizerdamper IQMP is temporarily overridden by thepre--occupancy damper position (PURGEMP). ThePURGEMP will be set to one of the following conditionsbased on atmospheric conditions and the spacetemperature:

S If the OAT ≥ NTLO (Unoccupied OAT LockoutTemperature) and OAT < 65_F and OAT is less than orequal to OCSP and Enthalpy = Low then PURGEMP =100%.

S If the OAT < NTLO then PURGEMP = LTMP (LowTemperature Minimum Position -- defaults to 10%)

S If the OAT > 65_F or (OAT ≥ NTLO and OAT > OCSP)or Enthalpy = High then PURGEMP = HTMP (HighTemperature Minimum Position defaults to 35%).

The LTMP and HTMP are user adjustable values from 0to 100% in the SETPOINT table. Whenever PURGEMPresults in a number greater than 0%, the IAQpre--occupancy purge mode will be enabled turning on theIndoor Fan Relay and setting the economizer IQMP to thePURGEMP value. When IAQ pre--occupancy mode is notactive PURGEMP = 0%.

Unoccupied Free Cooling — Unoccupied free coolfunction will start the indoor fan during unoccupied timesin order to cool the space with outside air. This function isperformed to delay the need for mechanical cooling whenthe system enters the occupied period. Depending on howUnoccupied Free Cooling is configured, unoccupied modecan occur at any time in the unoccupied time period or 2to 6 hours prior to the next occupied time. Once the spacehas been sufficiently cooled during this cycle, the fan willbe stopped. In order to perform unoccupied free coolingall of the following conditions must be met:

S NTEN option is enabled in the CONFIG configurationtable

S Unit is in unoccupied state

S Current time of day is valid

S Temperature Compensated Start mode is not active

48HC

Page 83: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

83

S COOL mode is not active

S HEAT mode is not active

S SPT reading is available

S OAT reading is available

S Enthalpy is low

S OAT > NTLO (with 1_F hysteresis) and < Max FreeCool setpoint

If any of the above conditions are not met, UnoccupiedFree Cool mode will be stopped, otherwise, the mode willbe controlled as follows:

The NTFC setpoint (NTSP) is determined as NTSP =(OCSP + OHSP) / 2The Unoccupied Free Cool mode will be started when:SPT > (NTSP + 2_F) and SPT > (OAT + 8_F)

The Unoccupied Free Cool mode will be stopped when:SPT < NTSP or SPT < (OAT + 3_F)

Temperature Compensated Start — This function will runwhen the controller is in unoccupied state and willcalculate early start bias time (SBT) based on spacetemperature deviation from occupied setpoints in minutesper degree. The following conditions will be met for thefunction to run:

S Unit is in unoccupied state

S Next occupied time is valid

S Current time of day is valid

S Valid space temperature reading is available (fromsensor or linkage thermostat)

S Cool Start Bias (KCOOL) and Heat Bias Start (KHEAT)> 0 in the CONFIG configuration table

The SBT is calculated by one of the following formulasdepending on temperature demand:

If SPT > OCSP then SBT = (SPT -- OCSP) * KCOOLIf SPT < OHSP then SPT = (OHSP -- SPT) * KHEAT.

The calculated start bias time can range from 0 to 255minutes. When SBT is greater than 0 the function willsubtract the SBT from the next occupied time to calculatea new start time. When a new start time is reached, theTemperature Compensated Start mode is started. Thismode energizes the fan and the unit will operate as thoughit is in occupied state. Once set, TemperatureCompensated Start mode will stay on until the unit returnsto occupied state. If either Unoccupied Free Cool or IAQPre--Occupancy mode is active when TemperatureCompensated Start begins, their mode will end.

Door Switch — The Door Switch function is designed todisable mechanical heating and cooling outputs when theREMOCC contact input is closed (in the ON state) after aprogrammed time delay.

The fan will continue to operate based on the currentmode and the ASHRAE 90.1 Supply Fan setting. Thedelay is programmable from 2 to 20 minutes by setting theRemote Cont/Door Switch decision in the SERVICE tableto a value equal to the number of minutes desired. Whenthe contact is open (in the OFF state), the PremierLink™controller will resume normal temperature control.

This application is designed for use in schools or otherpublic places where a door switch can be installed tomonitor the opening of a door for an extended period oftime. The controller will disable mechanical cooling andheating when the door is open for a programmed amountof time.

This function can also be used to monitor a highcondensate level switch when installed on a water sourceheat pump to disable mechanic cooling in case of aplugged evaporator condensate pan drain.Linkage — The Linkage function in the PremierLinkcontroller is available for applications using a Linkagethermostat or the 3V control system. If using the Linkagethermostat, both the PremierLink controller and the statmust be on the same CCN bus. When used as the airsource for a 3V control system, the PremierLink controlleris not required to be on the same CCN bus but it isrecommended. Linkage will be active when it is initiatedfrom the Linkage thermostat or the 3V LinkageCoordinator through CCN communications and requiresno configuration. Only one device can be linked to thePremierLink controller.

Once Linkage is active, the PremierLink controller’s ownSPT, temperature setpoints, and occupancy are ignoredand the controller will use the information provided by theremote linkage device. The following information will bereceived from the remote linked device and can be viewedin the maintenance display table:

S Supervisory Element

S Supervisory Bus

S Supervisory Block

S Average Occupied Heat Setpoint

S Average Occupied Cool Setpoint

S Average Unoccupied Heat Setpoint

S Average Unoccupied Cool Setpoint

S Average Zone Temp

S Average Occupied Zone Temp

S Occupancy Status

In return, the PremierLink controller will provide its SATand operating mode to the linked device.

It will convert its operating modes to Linkage modes. SeeTable 30.

48HC

Page 84: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

84

Table 30 – Linkage Modes

ROOFTOP MODE VALUE LINKAGE MODEDemand Limit N/A N/A

Heat 3 HeatingCool or Free Cooling 4 CoolingIAQ Control N/A N/A

Temp. CompensatedStart Heat 2 Warm---up

Temp. CompensatedStart Cool 4 Cooling

IAQ Purge 6 PressurizationOccupied

(Indoor Fan ON) 4 Cooling

Unoccupied FreeCool 5 Unoccupied Free

CoolingFire Shutdown 7 EvacFactory/Field Test 1 Off

Off 1 Off

The PremierLink™ controller will generate a LinkageCommunication Failure alarm if a failure occurs for 5consecutive minutes once a Linkage has previously beenestablished. It will then revert back to its own SPT,setpoints and occupancy schedule for control. For thisreason, Carrier strongly recommends that an SPT beinstalled in the space on open plenum systems or in thereturn air duct of ducted return air systems to providecontinued backup operation. When Linkagecommunication is restored, the controller will generate areturn to normal.

For more information on how the PremierLink controlleris used in conjunction with the Carrier 3V control system,contact your CCN controls representative.

IMPORTANT: The PremierLink controller should not beused as a linked air source in a ComfortIDt VAV system.The ComfortID VAV system will NOT function correctlywhen applied with a PremierLink controller as the airsource, resulting in poor comfort control and possibleequipment malfunction.NOTE: The PremierLink controller can be used as an airsource in a 3V Pressure Independent (PI) System (a 3VLinkage Coordinator with ComfortID PI ZoneControllers), but it should not be used as an air sourcewith ComfortID controllers unless a 3V zone controller isused as the Linkage Coordinator. Contact your CarrierCCN controls representative for assistance.

Demand Limit — If the demand limit option is enabled,the control will receive and accept Redline Alert andLoadshed commands from the CCN loadshed controller.When a redline alert is received, the control will set themaximum stage of capacity equal to the stage of capacitythat the unit is operating at when the redline alert wasinitiated.

When loadshed command is received the control willreduce capacity as shown in Table 31.

Table 31 – Loadshed Command — Gas and ElectricHeat Units

CURRENT CAPACITY NEW CAPACITYCMP1 DX Cooling OFF

CMP1+CMP2 CMP1HS1 Heat OFF

HS1+HS2 (+HS3) HS1

The controller will have a maximum demand limit timerof 1 hour that prevents the unit from staying in load shedor redline alert longer than 1 hour in the event thecontroller loses communication with the network loadshed module. Should the maximum demand limit timerexpire prior to receiving the loadshed device commandfrom CCN, the control will stop demand limit mode andreturn to normal operation.

RTU--MP Sequence of OperationThe RTU--MP will control the compressor, economizerand heating outputs based on its own space temperatureinput and setpoints. An optional CO2 IAQ sensor mountedin the space can influence the economizer minimumposition. The RTU--MP has its own hardware clock that isset automatically when the software is installed on theboard. The RTU--MP’s default is to control to occupiedsetpoints all the time, until a type of occupancy control isset. Occupancy types are described in the schedulingsection. The following sections describe the operation forthe functions of the RTU--MP. All point objects that arereferred to in this sequence will be in reference to theobjects as viewed in BACview6 Handheld.

Scheduling

Scheduling is used to start heating or cooling (becomeoccupied) based upon a day of week and a time period andcontrol to the occupied heating or cooling setpoints.Scheduling functions are located under occupancydetermination and the schedule menu accessed by theMenu softkey (see Appendix -- for menu structure). Yourlocal time and date should be set for these functions tooperate properly. Five scheduling functions are availableby changing the Occupancy Source to one of thefollowing selections:

Always Occupied (Default Occupancy)

The unit will run continuously. RTU--MP ships from thefactory with this setting.

Local Schedule

The unit will operate according to the schedule configuredand stored in the unit. The local schedule is made up ofthree hierarchy levels that consist of two Overrideschedules, twelve Holiday and four Daily schedules, andare only accessible by the BACview screen (handheld orvirtual).The Daily schedule is the lowest schedule in the hierarchyand is overridden by both the Holiday and Overrideschedule. It consists of a start time, a stop time (both in 24hour mode) and the seven days of the week, starting withMonday and ending in Sunday. To select a daily schedulescroll to the Schedules menu off of the Menu selection.

48HC

Page 85: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

85

Enter the User password and change the OccupancySource to Local Schedule. Scroll down and over to theDaily menu and press enter. Choose one of the four Dailyschedules by pressing the Next softkey and change theUse? point from NO to YES by selecting the point andpressing the INCR or DECR softkey. Press the OK softkeyand scroll to the start and stop times. Edit these timesfollowing the same steps as the Use? point. Finally scrolldown to the Days: section and highlight the days requiredfor the Daily schedule by INCR or DECR softkeys andpress OK softkey.The Holiday schedule is created to override the Dailyschedule and identify a specific day and month of the yearto start and stop the unit and change control to theunoccupied heating and cooling setpoints. Follow thesame steps to turn on one of the twelve Holiday schedulesand start and stop times. Next, select one out of the twelvemonths and one out of the thirty--one days of that month.The RTU--MP will now ignore the Daily schedule for thespecific day and time you selected and follow the HolidaySchedule for this period.The Override schedules primary purpose is to provide atemporary change in the occupied heating and coolingsetpoints and force the unit to control to the unoccupiedheating and cooling setpoints. This would occur on a setday in a particular month and last during the start and stoptime configured. The Override schedule is enabled byfollowing the same steps to create the Holiday schedule.NOTE: Push button override is only available whenrunning a local or BACnet Schedule.

BACnet Schedule

For use with a Building Automation System that supportsnative BACnet scheduling is scheduling the unit. With theOccupancy Source set to BACnet schedule the BAS willcontrol the unit through network communication and it’sown scheduling function.

BAS On/Off

The Building Automation System is scheduling the unitvia an On/Off command to the BAS ON/OFF softwarepoint. The Building Automation System can be speakingBACnet, Modbus, or N2 and is writing to the BAS On/Offpoint in the open protocol point map.NOTE: If the BAS supports NATIVE BACnetscheduling, then set the Occupancy Source to BACnetschedule. If the BAS is BACnet but does NOT supportNATIVE BACnet scheduling, then set the OccupancySource to BAS On/Off.

DI On/Off

A hard--wired input on the RTU--MP will command theunit to start/stop. Inputs 3, 5, 8, and 9 on plug J5 can behard--wired to command the unit to start/stop.NOTE: Scheduling can either be controlled via the unitor the BAS, but NOT both.

Indoor Fan

The indoor fan will be turned on whenever any one of thefollowing conditions is true:

S It is in the occupied mode. This will be determined byits own internal occupancy schedule.

S Whenever there is a demand for cooling or heating inthe unoccupied mode.

S Whenever the remote occupancy switch is closed duringDI On/Off schedule type or if occupancy is forcedoccupied by the BAS during BAS On/Off schedule type.

When transitioning from unoccupied to occupied, therewill be a configured time delay of 5 to 600 seconds beforestarting the fan. The fan will continue to run as long ascompressors, heating stages, or the dehumidificationrelays are on when transitioning from occupied tounoccupied with the exception of Shutdown mode. If FireShutdown, safety chain, SAT alarm or SPT alarm areactive; the fan will be shutdown immediately regardless ofthe occupancy state or demand.The RTU--MP has an optional Supply Fan Status input toprovide proof of airflow. If this is enabled, the point willlook for a contact closure whenever the Supply Fan Relayis on. If it is not enabled then it will always be the samestate as the Supply Fan Relay. The cooling, economizer,heating, dehumidification, CO2 and power exhaustroutines will use this input point for fan status.

Cooling

The compressor outputs are controlled by the CoolingControl PID Loop and Cooling Stages Capacity algorithm.They will be used to calculate the desired number ofstages needed to satisfy the space by comparing the SpaceTemperature (SPT) to the Occupied Cool Setpoint plus theT56 slider offset when occupied and the Unoccupied CoolSetpoint (UCSP) plus the T56 slider offset, if unoccupied.The economizer, if available, will be used for cooling inaddition to the compressors. The following conditionsmust be true in order for this algorithm to run:S Indoor Fan has been ON for at least 30 seconds.

S Heat mode is not active and the time guard betweenmodes equals zero.

S If occupied and the SPT>(occupied cool setpoint plusthe T56 slider offset).

S Space Temperature reading is available.

S If it is unoccupied and the SPT > (unoccupied coolsetpoint plus the T56 slider offset). The indoor fan willbe turned on by the staging algorithm.

S If economizer is available and active and economizeropen > 85% and SAT > (SAT low limit + 5_F) and SPT> effective setpoint + 0.5_F.

OREconomizer is available, but not active

OREconomizer is not available

S OAT > DX Lockout temperature.

48HC

Page 86: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

86

If all of the above conditions are met, the compressorswill be energized as required, otherwise they will bede--energized.There is a fixed 3--minute minimum on time and a5--minute off time for each compressor output and a3--minute minimum time delay between staging up ordown.Any time the compressors are running the RTU--MP willstage down the compressors if the SAT becomes less thanthe cooling low supply air setpoint.After a compressor is staged off, it may be started againafter a normal time--guard period and the supply airtemperature has increased above the low supply airsetpoint.

Economizer

The Economizer dampers are used to provide free coolingand Indoor Air Quality, if optional CO2 sensor is installed,when the outside conditions are suitable.The following conditions must be true for economizeroperation:S Indoor Fan has been on for at least 30 seconds.

S Enthalpy is Low if the Enthalpy input is enabled.

S SAT reading is available.

S OAT reading is available.

S SPT reading is available.

S OAT <= High OAT economizer lockout configuration(default = 75).

S OAT <= SPT

If any of the mentioned conditions are not true, theeconomizer will be set to its configured minimumposition. The minimum damper position can beoverridden by the IAQ routine described later in thissection.If the above conditions are true, the Economizer ControlMaster Loop will calculate a damper position value basedon the following calculation:Damper Position = minimum position + PID (SPT -- econsetpoint). Econ setpoint is half way between the effectivecool and heat setpoints. If the SAT drops below thecooling low supply air setpoint (+ 5_F), the economizerwill ramp down to minimum position.

Power Exhaust

If RTU--MP is also controlling an exhaust fan, it can beenabled based on damper position or by occupancy. Ifconfigured for continuous occupied operation, it will beenergized whenever the controller is in the occupied modeand disabled when in the unoccupied mode.

If configured for damper position control, it will beenergized whenever the economizer exceeds the powerexhaust setpoint and disabled when the economizer dropsbelow the setpoint by a fixed hysteresis of 10%.

Heating

The heating outputs are controlled by the Heating ControlPID Loop and Heating Stages Capacity algorithm. Theywill be used to calculate the desired number of stagesneeded to satisfy the space by comparing the SPT to theOccupied Heat Setpoint plus the T56 slider offset whenoccupied and the Unoccupied Heat Setpoint plus the T56slider offset if unoccupied. The following conditions mustbe true in order for this algorithm to run:S Indoor Fan has been ON for at least 30 seconds.

S Cool mode is not active and the time guard betweenmodes equals zero.

S If occupied and SPT<(occupied heat setpoint plus T56slider offset)

S SPT reading is available

S If it is unoccupied and the SPT < (unoccupied heatsetpoint plus T56 slider offset). The indoor fan will beturned on by the staging algorithm.

S OAT< High OAT lockout temperature.

If all of the above conditions are met, the heating outputswill be energized as required, otherwise they will bede--energized. If the SAT begins to exceed the high supplyair setpoint, a ramping function will cause the Heat StagesCapacity algorithm to decrease the number of stages untilthe SAT has dropped below the setpoint.There is a fixed one minute minimum on time and a oneminute off time for each heat output. Heat staging has a 3minute stage up and 30 second stage down delay.

Indoor Air Quality

If the optional indoor air quality sensor is installed, theRTU--MP will maintain indoor air quality within the spaceat the user configured differential setpoint. The setpoint isthe difference between the indoor air quality and anoptional outdoor air quality sensor. If the outdoor airquality is not present then a fixed value of 400ppm isused. The following conditions must be true in order forthis algorithm to run:S The mode is occupied.

S Indoor Fan has been ON for at least 30 seconds.

S Indoor Air Quality sensor has a valid reading

As air quality within the space changes, the minimumposition of the economizer damper will be changed thusallowing more or less outdoor air into the space dependingon the relationship of the indoor air quality to thedifferential setpoint. If all the above conditions are true,the IAQ algorithm will run and calculates an IAQminimum position value using a PID loop. The IAQminimum damper position is then compared against theuser configured economizer minimum position and thegreatest value becomes the final minimum damperposition of the economizer output.If the calculated IAQ minimum position is greater thanthe IAQ maximum damper position configuration then itwill be clamped to the configured value.

48HC

Page 87: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

87

Demand Limit

If the RTU--MP receives a level 1 (one degree offset), 2(two degree offset), or a 3 (4 degree offset) to the BACnetdemand limit variable, the controller will expand theheating and cooling setpoints by the configured demandlimit setpoint value and remain in effect until the BACnetdemand limit variable receives a 0 value.

FASTENER TORQUE VALUESSee Table 32 for torque values.

Table 32 – Torque Values

Supply fan motor mounting 120 +/--- 12 in--- lbsSupply fan motor adjustment plate 120 +/--- 12 in--- lbsMotor pulley setscrew 72+/--- 5 in--- lbsFan pulley setscrew 72+/--- 5 in--- lbsBlower wheel hub setscrew 72+/--- 5 in--- lbsBearing locking collar setscrew 65---70 in--- lbsCompressor mounting bolts 65---75 in--- lbsCondenser fan motor mounting bolts 20 +/--- 2 in--- lbsCondenser fan hub setscrew 84 +/--- 12 in--- lbs

48HC

Page 88: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

88

APPENDIX I. MODEL NUMBER SIGNIFICANCEModel Number Nomenclature

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 184 8 H C D D 0 8 A 3 A 5 -- 0 A 0 A 0____ ____ ____

Unit Type48 = Gas Heat Packaged

Rooftop

Model Series---WeatherMasterHC = Ultra High Efficiency Brand / Packaging

Heat Size 0 = StandardD = Low gas heat 1 = LTLE = Medium gas heatF = High gas heatL = Low NOx, low gas heatM = Low NOx, medium gas heat Electrical OptionsN = Low NOx, high gas heat A = NoneS = Low heat with stainless steel exchanger C = Non--- fused disconnectR = Med heat with stainless steel exchanger D = Thru the base connectionsT = High heat with stainless steel exchanger F = Non--- fused & thru the base(Low Nox models include stainless steel HX)Refrig. System OptionsA = Single stage cooling models with TXV Service Optionsmetering device control 0 = None

D = 2---Stage cooling models with TXV meteringdevice control 1 = Unpowered convenience outlet

2 = Powered convenience outletNominal Cooling Tons 3 = Hinged panels04 = 3 Ton 08 = 7.5 Ton 4 = Hinged panels, unpwrd conv outlet05 = 4 Ton 09 = 8.5 Ton 5 = Hinged panels, pwrd conv outlet06 = 5 Ton07 = 6 Ton Air Intake / Exhaust Options

A = NoneSensor Options B = Temp econo w/ baro reliefA = None F = Enthalpy econo w/ baro reliefB = RA smoke detector K = 2---Position damperC = SA smoke detectorD = RA & SA smoke detector Base Unit ControlsE = CO2 sensor 0 = ElectromechanicalF = RA smoke detector & CO2 1 = PremierLink DDC controllerG = SA smoke detector & CO2 2 = RTU---MP multi protocol controllerH = RA & SA smoke detector & CO2

Design RevIndoor Fan Options---3,4,5 Ton Models Only --- Factory design revision0 = Electric (direct) drive X13 motor2 = Medium static option---belt drive3 = High static option---belt drive VoltageIndoor Fan Options---6,7.5,8.5 Ton Models Only 1 = 575/3/601 = Standard static option---belt drive 3 = 208---230/1/602 = Medium static option---belt drive 5 = 208---230/3/603 = High static option---belt drive 6 = 460/3/60

Coil Options fin/tube (condenser---evaporator---hail guardA = Al/Cu --- Al/CuB = Precoat Al/Cu --- Al/CuC = E coat Al/Cu --- Al---CuD = E coat Al/Cu---E coat Al/CuE = Cu/Cu---Al/CuM = Al/Cu --- Al/Cu --- Louvered Hail GuardN = Precoat Al/Cu --- Al/Cu --- Louvered Hail GuardP = Ecoat Al/Cu --- Al/Cu --- Louvered Hail GuardQ = Ecoat Al/Cu --- Ecoat Al/Cu --- Louvered Hail GuardR = Cu/Cu---Al/Cu---Louvered Hail GuardS = Cu/Cu---Al/Cu---Louvered Hail Guard

48HC

Page 89: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

89

APPENDIX II. PHYSICAL DATA

PHYSICAL DATA (COOLING) 3 -- 6 TONS48HC*A04 48HC*A05 48HC*A06 48HC*A07

Refrigeration System# Circuits / # Comp. / Type 1 / 1 / Scroll 1 / 1 / Scroll 1 / 1 / Scroll 1 / 1 / Scroll

Puronr refrig. (R---410A) charge A/B (lbs---oz) 9 --- 0 12 --- 8 13 --- 3 14 --- 0Metering Device TXV TXV TXV TXV

High---press. Trip / Reset (psig) 630 / 505 630 / 505 630 / 505 630 / 505Low---press. Trip / Reset (psig) 54 / 117 54 / 117 54 / 117 54 / 117

Evap. CoilMaterial (Tube Fin) Cu / Al Cu / Al Cu / Al Cu / Al

Coil type 3/8” RTPF 3/8” RTPF 3/8” RTPF 3/8” RTPFRows / FPI 3 / 15 3 / 15 4 / 15 3 / 15

Total Face Area (ft2) 5.5 7.3 7.3 8.9Condensate Drain Conn. Size 3/4” 3/4” 3/4” 3/4”

Evap. Fan and Motor

StandardStatic

1phase

Motor Qty / Drive Type 1 / Direct 1 / Direct 1 / Direct n/aMax BHP 1 1 1 n/aRPM Range 600---1200 600---1200 600---1200 n/a

Motor Frame Size 48 48 48 n/aFan Qty / Type 1 / Centrifugal 1 / Centrifugal 1 / Centrifugal n/aFan Diameter (in) 10 x 10 10 x 10 11 x 10 n/a

MediumStatic

1phase

Motor Qty / Drive Type n/a n/a n/a n/aMax BHP n/a n/a n/a n/aRPM Range n/a n/a n/a n/a

Motor Frame Size n/a n/a n/a n/aFan Qty / Type n/a n/a n/a n/aFan Diameter (in) n/a n/a n/a n/a

StandardStatic

3phase

Motor Qty / Drive Type 1 / Direct 1 / Direct 1 / Direct 1 / BeltMax BHP 1 1 1 2.4RPM Range 600---1200 600---1200 600---1200 1073---1457

Motor Frame Size 48 48 48 56Fan Qty / Type 1 / Centrifugal 1 / Centrifugal 1 / Centrifugal 1 / CentrifugalFan Diameter (in) 10 x 10 10 x 10 11 x 10 10 x 10

MediumStatic

3phase

Motor Qty / Drive Type 1 / Belt 1 / Belt 1 / Belt 1 / BeltMax BHP 1.2 1.7 2.4 2.9RPM Range 770---1175 920---1303 1035---1466 1173---1518

Motor Frame Size 48 56 56 56Fan Qty / Type 1 / Centrifugal 1 / Centrifugal 1 / Centrifugal 1 / CentrifugalFan Diameter (in) 10 x 10 10 x 10 10 x 10 10 x 10

HighStatic

3phase

Motor Qty / Drive Type 1 / Belt 1 / Belt 1 / Belt 1 / BeltMax BHP 2.4 2.9 2.9 3.7RPM Range 1035---1466 1208---1639 1303---1687 1474---1788

Motor Frame Size 56 56 56 56Fan Qty / Type 1 / Centrifugal 1 / Centrifugal 1 / Centrifugal 1 / CentrifugalFan Diameter (in) 10 x 10 10 x 10 10 x 10 10 x 10

Cond. CoilMaterial (Tube/Fin) Cu / Al Cu / Al Cu / Al Cu / Al

Coil type 3/8” RTPF 3/8” RTPF 3/8” RTPF 3/8” RTPFRows / FPI 2 / 17 2 / 17 2 / 17 2 / 17

Total Face Area (ft2) 12.7 21.3 21.3 20.5Cond. fan / motor

Qty / Motor Drive Type 1/ Direct 1/ Direct 1/ Direct 2/ DirectMotor HP / RPM 1/8 / 825 1/4 / 1100 1/4 / 1100 1/4 / 1100Fan diameter (in) 22 22 22 22

FiltersRA Filter # / Size (in) 2 / 16 x 25 x 2 4 / 16 x 16 x 2 4 / 16 x 16 x 2 4 / 16 x 20 x 2

OA inlet screen # / Size (in) 1 / 20 x 24 x 1 1 / 20 x 24 x 1 1 / 20 x 24 x 1 1 / 20 x 24 x 1

48HC

Page 90: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

90

APPENDIX II. PHYSICAL DATA (cont.)

PHYSICAL DATA (HEATING) 3 -- 6 TONS48HC**04 48HC**05 48HC**06 48HC**07

Gas Connection# of Gas Valves 1 1 1 1

Nat. gas supply line press (in. w.g.)/(PSIG) 4 ---13 / 0.18 --- 0.47 4 ---13 / 0.18 --- 0.47 4 ---13 / 0.18 --- 0.47 4 ---13 / 0.18 --- 0.47Propane supply line press (in. w.g.)/(PSIG) 11 ---13 / 0.40 --- 0.47 11 ---13 / 0.40 --- 0.47 11 ---13 / 0.40 --- 0.47 11 ---13 / 0.40 --- 0.47

Heat Anticipator Setting (Amps)1st stage 0.14 0.14 0.14 0.142nd stage 0.14 0.14 0.14 0.14

Natural Gas, Propane Heat# of stages / # of burners (total) 1 or 2 / 2 1 or 2 / 2 1 or 2 / 2 2 / 2

LOW

Connection size 1/2” NPT 1/2” NPT 1/2” NPT 1/2” NPTRollout switch opens / closes 195 / 115 195 / 115 195 / 115 195 / 115Temperature rise range (F) 25 --- 55 25 --- 55 20 --- 55 15 --- 55

# of stages / # of burners (total) 1 or 2 / 3 1 or 2 / 3 1 or 2 / 3 2 / 3

MED Connection size 1/2” NPT 1/2” NPT 1/2” NPT 1/2” NPT

Rollout switch opens / closes 195 / 115 195 / 115 195 / 115 195 / 115Temperature rise range (F) 55 --- 85 35 --- 65 30 --- 65 20 --- 50

Connection size --- 1 or 2 / 3 1 or 2 / 3 2 / 4

HIGH # of stages / # of burners (total) --- 1/2” NPT 1/2” NPT 3/4” NPT

Rollout switch opens / closes --- 195 / 115 195 / 115 195 / 115Temperature rise range (F) --- 50 --- 80 40 --- 80 30 --- 60

Low NOx Gas Heat# of stages / # of burners (total) 1 or 2 / 2 1 or 2 / 2 1 or 2 / 2 ---

LOW

Connection size 1/2” NPT 1/2” NPT 1/2” NPT ---Rollout switch opens / closes 195 / 115 195 / 115 195 / 115 ---Temperature rise range (F) 20 --- 50 20 --- 50 15 --- 50 ---

# of stages / # of burners (total) 1 or 2 / 3 1 or 2 / 3 1 or 2 / 3 ---

MED

Connection size 1/2” NPT 1/2” NPT 1/2” NPT ---Rollout switch opens / closes 195 / 115 195 / 115 195 / 115 ---Temperature rise range (F) 30 --- 60 30 --- 60 25 --- 60 ---

---

# of stages / # of burners (total) --- 1 or 2 / 3 1 or 2 / 3 ---

HIGH Connection size --- 1/2” NPT 1/2” NPT ---

Rollout switch opens / closes --- 195 / 115 195 / 115 ---Temperature rise range (F) --- 40 --- 70 35 --- 70 ---

48HC

Page 91: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

91

APPENDIX II. PHYSICAL DATA (cont.)

PHYSICAL DATA (COOLING) 7.5 -- 8.5 TONS48HC*D08 48HC*D09

Refrigeration System# Circuits / # Comp. / Type 2 / 2 / Scroll 2 / 2 / Scroll

R---410a charge A/B (lbs --- oz) 9 --- 10 / 9 --- 10 9 --- 19 / 9 --- 14Metering device TXV TXV

High---press. Trip / Reset (psig) 630 / 505 630 / 505Low---press. Trip / Reset (psig) 54 / 117 54 / 117

Evap. CoilMaterial (Tube/Fin) Cu / Al Cu / Al

Coil type 3/8” RTPF 3/8” RTPFRows / FPI 4 / 15 4 / 15

total face area (ft2) 11.1 11.1Condensate drain conn. size 3/4” 3/4”

Evap. fan and motor

StandardStatic

3phase

Motor Qty / Drive type 1 / Belt 1 / BeltMax BHP 1.7 1.7RPM range 518---733 518---733

motor frame size 56 56Fan Qty / Type 1 / Centrifugal 1 / Centrifugal

Fan Diameter (in) 15 x 15 15 x 15

MediumStatic

3phase

Motor Qty / Drive type 1 / Belt 1 / BeltMax BHP 2.4 2.4RPM range 690---936 690---936

motor frame size 56 56Fan Qty / Type 1 / Centrifugal 1 / Centrifugal

Fan Diameter (in) 15 x 15 15 x 15

HighStatic

3phase

Motor Qty / Drive type 1 / Belt 1 / BeltMax BHP 3.7 3.7RPM range 838---1084 838---1084

motor frame size 56 56Fan Qty / Type 1 / Centrifugal 1 / Centrifugal

Fan Diameter (in) 15 x 15 15 x 15

Cond. CoilMaterial (Tube/Fin) Cu / Al Cu / Al

Coil type 3/8” RTPF 3/8” RTPFRows / FPI 2 / 17 2 / 17

Total Face Area (ft2) 25.1 25.1Cond. fan / motor

Qty / Motor drive type 2 / direct 2 / directMotor HP / RPM 1/4 / 1100 1/4 / 1100Fan diameter (in) 22 22

FiltersRA Filter # / size (in) 4 / 20 x 20 x 2 4 / 20 x 20 x 2

OA inlet screen # / size (in) 1 / 20 x 24 x 1 1 / 20 x 24 x 1

48HC

Page 92: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

92

APPENDIX II. PHYSICAL DATA (cont.)

PHYSICAL DATA (HEATING) 7.5 -- 8.5 TONS48HC**08 48HC**09

Gas Connection# of Gas Valves 1 1

Nat. gas supply line press (in. w.g.)/(PSIG) 4 ---13 / 0.18 --- 0.47 4 ---13 / 0.18 --- 0.47Propane supply line press (in. w.g.)/(PSIG) 11 ---13 / 0.40 --- 0.47 11 ---13 / 0.40 --- 0.47

Heat Anticipator Setting (Amps)1st stage 0.14 0.142nd stage 0.14 0.14

Natural Gas, Propane Heat# of stages / # of burners (total) 2 / 3 2 / 3

LOW

Connection size 1/2” NPT 1/2” NPTRollout switch opens / closes 195 / 115 195 / 115Temperature rise range (F) 20 --- 50 20 --- 50

# of stages / # of burners (total) 2 / 4 2 / 4

MED Connection size 3/4” NPT 3/4” NPT

Rollout switch opens / closes 195 / 115 195 / 115Temperature rise range (F) 35 --- 65 30 --- 65

# of stages / # of burners (total) 2 / 5 2 / 5

HIGH Connection size 3/4” NPT 3/4” NPT

Rollout switch opens / closes 195 / 115 195 / 115Temperature rise range (F) 45 --- 75 40 --- 75

48HC

Page 93: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

93

APPENDIX

III.FA

NPERFORMANCE

Table33

–48HC**04----3PHASE

----3TONHORIZONTA

LSU

PPLY

CFM

AvailableExternalStaticPressure(in.wg)

0.2

0.4

0.6

0.8

1.0

1.2

1.4

1.6

1.8

2.0

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

900

582

0.14

715

0.24

825

0.35

921

0.48

1007

0.63

1086

0.79

1159

0.96

1228

1.14

1293

1.33

1354

1.53

975

606

0.16

735

0.26

843

0.38

938

0.51

1023

0.66

1101

0.82

1174

0.99

1242

1.18

1306

1.37

1367

1.57

1050

630

0.18

756

0.29

862

0.41

955

0.55

1040

0.70

1117

0.86

1189

1.03

1256

1.22

1320

1.41

1381

1.62

1125

655

0.21

778

0.32

882

0.45

974

0.58

1057

0.74

1133

0.90

1204

1.08

1271

1.26

1335

1.46

1395

1.67

1200

681

0.24

800

0.35

902

0.48

992

0.63

1074

0.78

1150

0.95

1221

1.13

1287

1.31

1350

1.51

1410

1.72

1275

708

0.27

823

0.39

923

0.53

1012

0.67

1093

0.83

1168

1.00

1237

1.18

1303

1.37

1365

1.57

1425

1.78

1350

735

0.31

847

0.43

945

0.57

1032

0.72

1112

0.88

1186

1.05

1255

1.24

1320

1.43

1382

1.63

1441

1.84

1425

762

0.35

871

0.48

967

0.62

1053

0.77

1131

0.94

1204

1.11

1272

1.30

1337

1.49

1398

1.70

1457

1.91

1500

790

0.40

896

0.53

990

0.67

1074

0.83

1151

1.00

1223

1.18

1291

1.36

1355

1.56

1415

1.77

1473

1.99

NOTE:Formoreinformation,seeGeneralFanPerformanceNotes.

Boldfaceindicatesfield---supplieddriveisrequired.

*Mediumstatic770---1175RPM,1.2BHPmax

*Highstatic1035---1466RPM,2.4BHPmax

Table34

–48HC**04----3PHASE

----3TONVERTICALSU

PPLY

CFM

AvailableExternalStaticPressure(in.wg)

0.2

0.4

0.6

0.8

1.0

1.2

1.4

1.6

1.8

2.0

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

900

592

0.14

721

0.25

826

0.38

916

0.53

997

0.69

1070

0.88

1137

1.07

1201

1.29

1260

1.51

1317

1.75

975

616

0.17

744

0.28

847

0.41

936

0.56

1016

0.72

1089

0.91

1156

1.11

1219

1.32

1279

1.54

1335

1.78

1050

641

0.19

766

0.30

868

0.44

957

0.59

1036

0.76

1108

0.94

1175

1.14

1238

1.36

1297

1.58

1353

1.82

1125

667

0.22

790

0.33

890

0.47

978

0.63

1056

0.80

1128

0.98

1195

1.18

1257

1.40

1316

1.62

1372

1.86

1200

693

0.25

813

0.37

913

0.51

999

0.67

1077

0.84

1148

1.03

1214

1.23

1276

1.44

1335

1.67

1391

1.91

1275

720

0.29

837

0.41

935

0.55

1021

0.71

1098

0.88

1169

1.07

1235

1.28

1296

1.50

1354

1.72

1410

1.97

1350

747

0.33

862

0.45

958

0.60

1043

0.76

1119

0.94

1190

1.13

1255

1.33

1316

1.55

1374

1.78

1429

2.03

1425

775

0.37

887

0.50

982

0.65

1066

0.81

1141

0.99

1211

1.19

1276

1.39

1337

1.61

1394

1.85

1449

2.09

1500

802

0.42

912

0.55

1006

0.70

1088

0.87

1163

1.05

1232

1.25

1297

1.46

1357

1.68

1415

1.91

1469

2.16

NOTE:Formoreinformation,seeGeneralFanPerformanceNotes.

Boldfaceindicatesfield---supplieddriveisrequired.

*Mediumstatic770---1175RPM,,1.2BHPmax

*Highstatic1035---1466RPM,2.4BHPmax

48HC

Page 94: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

94

94

APPENDIX

III.FA

NPERFORMANCE(cont.)

Table35

–48HC**05----3PHASE

----4TONHORIZONTA

LSU

PPLY

CFM

AvailableExternalStaticPressure(in.wg)

0.2

0.4

0.6

0.8

1.0

1.2

1.4

1.6

1.8

2.0

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

1200

681

0.24

800

0.35

902

0.48

992

0.63

1074

0.78

1150

0.95

1221

1.13

1287

1.31

1350

1.51

1410

1.72

1300

717

0.29

831

0.41

930

0.54

1019

0.69

1099

0.85

1173

1.02

1243

1.20

1309

1.39

1371

1.59

1430

1.80

1400

753

0.34

863

0.46

959

0.60

1046

0.75

1125

0.92

1198

1.09

1266

1.28

1331

1.47

1393

1.68

1451

1.89

1500

790

0.40

896

0.53

990

0.67

1074

0.83

1151

1.00

1223

1.18

1291

1.36

1355

1.56

1415

1.77

1473

1.99

1600

828

0.46

930

0.60

1021

0.75

1103

0.91

1179

1.09

1249

1.27

1316

1.46

1379

1.66

1439

1.87

1496

2.09

1700

866

0.54

964

0.68

1053

0.84

1133

1.01

1207

1.18

1277

1.37

1342

1.57

1404

1.77

1463

1.99

1520

2.21

1800

905

0.62

1000

0.77

1085

0.94

1164

1.11

1236

1.29

1305

1.48

1369

1.68

1430

1.89

1489

2.11

1545

2.34

1900

944

0.71

1036

0.87

1119

1.04

1195

1.22

1266

1.41

1333

1.60

1397

1.81

1457

2.02

1514

2.25

1570

2.48

2000

984

0.82

1072

0.98

1153

1.15

1227

1.34

1297

1.53

1363

1.73

1425

1.94

1484

2.16

1541

2.39

1596

2.63

NOTE:Formoreinformation,seeGeneralFanPerformanceNotes.

Boldfaceindicatesfield---supplieddriveisrequired.

*Mediumstatic920---1303RPM,1.7BHPmax

*Highstatic1208---1639RPM,2.9BHPmax

Table36

–48HC**05----3PHASE

----4TONVERTICALSU

PPLY

CFM

AvailableExternalStaticPressure(in.wg)

0.2

0.4

0.6

0.8

1.0

1.2

1.4

1.6

1.8

2.0

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

1200

693

0.25

813

0.37

913

0.51

999

0.67

1077

0.84

1148

1.03

1214

1.23

1276

1.44

1335

1.67

1391

1.91

1300

729

0.30

846

0.42

943

0.57

1028

0.73

1105

0.90

1176

1.09

1241

1.30

1303

1.51

1361

1.74

1416

1.98

1400

765

0.35

879

0.48

974

0.63

1058

0.79

1134

0.97

1204

1.17

1269

1.37

1330

1.59

1388

1.82

1442

2.07

1500

802

0.42

912

0.55

1006

0.70

1088

0.87

1163

1.05

1232

1.25

1297

1.46

1357

1.68

1415

1.91

1469

2.16

1600

840

0.49

947

0.63

1038

0.78

1119

0.95

1193

1.14

1262

1.34

1325

1.55

1385

1.78

1442

2.01

1496

2.26

1700

878

0.57

982

0.71

1071

0.87

1151

1.05

1224

1.24

1291

1.44

1354

1.66

1414

1.89

1470

2.12

1524

2.37

1800

917

0.65

1017

0.81

1105

0.97

1183

1.15

1255

1.35

1322

1.55

1384

1.77

1443

2.00

1499

2.25

1552

2.50

1900

956

0.75

1053

0.91

1139

1.08

1216

1.27

1287

1.47

1352

1.68

1414

1.90

1472

2.13

1528

2.38

1580

2.63

2000

995

0.86

1090

1.02

1173

1.20

1249

1.39

1319

1.59

1384

1.81

1445

2.04

1502

2.27

1557

2.52

1609

2.78

NOTE:Formoreinformation,seeGeneralFanPerformanceNotes.

Boldfaceindicatesfield---supplieddriveisrequired.

*Mediumstatic920---1303RPM,1.7BHPmax

*Highstatic1208---1639RPM,2.9BHPmax

48HC

Page 95: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

95

APPENDIX

III.FA

NPERFORMANCE(cont.)

Table37

–48HC**06----3PHASE

----5TONHORIZONTA

LSU

PPLY

CFM

AvailableExternalStaticPressure(in.wg)

0.2

0.4

0.6

0.8

1.0

1.2

1.4

1.6

1.8

2.0

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

1500

798

0.41

906

0.55

1002

0.71

1088

0.87

1167

1.05

1241

1.23

1310

1.42

1375

1.63

1438

1.84

1497

2.06

1625

845

0.50

949

0.65

1041

0.81

1125

0.98

1202

1.17

1274

1.36

1342

1.56

1406

1.77

1467

1.98

1526

2.21

1750

893

0.60

993

0.76

1081

0.93

1163

1.11

1238

1.30

1308

1.50

1375

1.70

1438

1.92

1498

2.14

1555

2.37

1875

942

0.71

1037

0.88

1123

1.06

1202

1.25

1275

1.44

1344

1.65

1409

1.86

1471

2.09

1530

2.32

1586

2.55

2000

992

0.84

1083

1.02

1166

1.21

1242

1.40

1313

1.61

1380

1.82

1444

2.04

1505

2.27

1563

2.51

1619

2.75

2125

1043

0.98

1129

1.17

1209

1.37

1283

1.57

1353

1.79

1418

2.01

1481

2.24

1540

2.47

1597

2.72

1652

2.97

2250

1093

1.14

1177

1.34

1254

1.55

1325

1.76

1393

1.98

1457

2.21

1518

2.45

1576

2.69

1632

2.94

1686

3.20

2375

1145

1.32

1225

1.53

1299

1.74

1369

1.97

1434

2.20

1497

2.43

1556

2.68

1614

2.93

1669

3.19

------

2500

1196

1.51

1273

1.73

1345

1.96

1413

2.19

1477

2.43

1538

2.68

1596

2.93

1652

3.19

------

------

NOTE:Formoreinformation,seeGeneralFanPerformanceNotes.

Boldfaceindicatesfield---supplieddriveisrequired.

*Mediumstatic1035---1466RPM,2.4BHP

*Highstatic1303---1687RPM,2.9BHPmax

Table38

–48HC**06----3PHASE

----5TONVERTICALSU

PPLY

CFM

AvailableExternalStaticPressure(in.wg)

0.2

0.4

0.6

0.8

1.0

1.2

1.4

1.6

1.8

2.0

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

1500

847

0.41

966

0.55

1067

0.68

1158

0.81

1240

0.93

1316

1.05

1387

1.17

1454

1.28

1517

1.39

1578

1.50

1625

896

0.50

1010

0.65

1109

0.79

1198

0.93

1278

1.07

1353

1.20

1423

1.33

1489

1.46

1552

1.58

1611

1.70

1750

947

0.59

1056

0.76

1152

0.92

1238

1.07

1318

1.22

1391

1.36

1460

1.51

1525

1.65

1587

1.78

1646

1.91

1875

998

0.70

1103

0.88

1196

1.05

1280

1.22

1358

1.38

1430

1.54

1498

1.70

1562

1.85

1623

2.00

1681

2.14

2000

1049

0.82

1151

1.02

1241

1.20

1323

1.38

1399

1.56

1470

1.73

1537

1.90

1600

2.06

1660

2.23

1718

2.38

2125

1102

0.96

1199

1.17

1287

1.37

1367

1.56

1441

1.75

1511

1.93

1576

2.12

1639

2.29

1698

2.47

1755

2.64

2250

1154

1.11

1248

1.33

1333

1.55

1411

1.75

1484

1.96

1552

2.15

1617

2.35

1678

2.54

1737

2.73

1793

2.92

2375

1208

1.28

1298

1.52

1381

1.74

1457

1.96

1528

2.18

1595

2.39

1658

2.60

1718

2.80

1776

3.01

------

2500

1261

1.47

1349

1.72

1429

1.96

1503

2.19

1572

2.42

1638

2.64

1700

2.87

1760

3.08

------

------

NOTE:Formoreinformation,seeGeneralFanPerformanceNotes.

Boldfaceindicatesfield---supplieddriveisrequired.

*Mediumstatic1035---1466RPM,2.4BHP

*Highstatic1303---1687RPM,2.9BHPmax

48HC

Page 96: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

96

96

APPENDIX

III.FA

NPERFORMANCE(cont.)

Table39

–48HC**07----3PHASE

----6TONHORIZONTA

LSU

PPLY

CFM

AvailableExternalStaticPressure(in.wg)

0.2

0.4

0.6

0.8

1.0

1.2

1.4

1.6

1.8

2.0

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

1800

441

0.33

533

0.51

611

0.72

681

0.96

745

1.23

804

1.51

860

1.82

912

2.15

961

2.49

1008

2.85

1950

462

0.38

550

0.58

626

0.80

694

1.04

757

1.31

815

1.60

869

1.91

920

2.24

969

2.59

1016

2.96

2100

483

0.45

567

0.65

641

0.88

708

1.13

769

1.40

826

1.70

880

2.01

930

2.35

978

2.70

1024

3.07

2250

505

0.52

586

0.73

657

0.97

722

1.22

782

1.50

838

1.81

891

2.12

941

2.46

988

2.82

1033

3.19

2400

528

0.60

605

0.82

674

1.07

738

1.33

796

1.62

851

1.92

903

2.25

952

2.59

999

2.95

1043

3.33

2550

550

0.69

625

0.92

692

1.17

754

1.45

811

1.74

865

2.05

916

2.38

964

2.73

1010

3.10

1054

3.48

2700

574

0.80

645

1.03

710

1.29

770

1.57

826

1.88

879

2.19

929

2.53

976

2.88

1022

3.25

1066

3.64

2850

597

0.91

666

1.16

729

1.43

788

1.71

843

2.02

894

2.35

943

2.69

990

3.05

1035

3.43

1078

3.82

3000

621

1.03

688

1.29

749

1.57

806

1.87

859

2.18

910

2.51

958

2.86

1004

3.23

1048

3.61

1090

4.01

NOTE:Formoreinformation,seeGeneralFanPerformanceNotes.

Boldfaceindicatesfield---supplieddriveisrequired.

*Standardstatic489---747RPM,1.7BHPmax

*Mediumstatic733---949RPM,2.9BHPmax

*Highstatic909---1102RPM,4.7BHPmax

Table40

–48HC**07----3PHASE

----6TONVERTICALSU

PPLY

CFM

AvailableExternalStaticPressure(in.wg)

0.2

0.4

0.6

0.8

1.0

1.2

1.4

1.6

1.8

2.0

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

1800

449

0.34

539

0.53

615

0.75

681

0.99

742

1.26

797

1.54

848

1.84

896

2.16

942

2.49

985

2.84

1950

470

0.40

557

0.60

631

0.83

696

1.08

756

1.35

810

1.64

861

1.94

909

2.26

954

2.60

997

2.96

2100

491

0.47

576

0.68

648

0.91

712

1.17

771

1.45

824

1.74

875

2.06

922

2.38

967

2.73

1009

3.09

2250

513

0.54

595

0.76

665

1.01

728

1.27

786

1.56

839

1.86

889

2.18

935

2.52

980

2.87

1022

3.23

2400

536

0.63

615

0.86

684

1.11

745

1.39

802

1.68

854

1.99

903

2.32

950

2.66

993

3.02

1035

3.39

2550

558

0.72

635

0.97

702

1.23

763

1.51

818

1.81

870

2.13

918

2.46

964

2.81

1008

3.18

1049

3.55

2700

582

0.83

656

1.08

721

1.35

781

1.65

835

1.95

886

2.28

934

2.62

979

2.98

1022

3.35

1063

3.74

2850

605

0.94

677

1.21

741

1.49

799

1.79

853

2.11

903

2.44

950

2.79

995

3.16

1037

3.54

1078

3.93

3000

629

1.07

699

1.35

761

1.64

818

1.95

871

2.28

920

2.62

966

2.98

1010

3.35

1052

3.74

1093

4.14

NOTE:Formoreinformation,seeGeneralFanPerformanceNotes.

Boldfaceindicatesfield---supplieddriveisrequired.

*Standardstatic489---747RPM,1.7BHPmax

*Mediumstatic733---949RPM,2.9BHPmax

*Highstatic909---1102RPM,4.7BHPmax

48HC

Page 97: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

97

APPENDIX

III.FA

NPERFORMANCE(cont.)

Table41

–48HC**08----3PHASE

----7.5TONHORIZONTA

LSU

PPLY

CFM

AvailableExternalStaticPressure(in.wg)

0.2

0.4

0.6

0.8

1.0

1.2

1.4

1.6

1.8

2.0

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

2250

482

0.36

577

0.51

659

0.66

732

0.82

799

0.98

860

1.14

917

1.31

971

1.48

1022

1.66

1071

1.84

2438

505

0.43

597

0.59

676

0.75

748

0.92

813

1.09

873

1.27

929

1.45

983

1.63

1033

1.81

1081

2.00

2625

529

0.51

617

0.68

694

0.85

764

1.03

827

1.22

887

1.40

942

1.59

995

1.78

1045

1.98

1092

2.18

2813

554

0.60

638

0.78

713

0.97

781

1.16

843

1.35

901

1.55

956

1.75

1008

1.95

1057

2.15

1104

2.36

3000

579

0.70

660

0.89

732

1.09

799

1.29

860

1.50

917

1.70

970

1.91

1021

2.13

1070

2.34

1117

2.56

3188

604

0.81

683

1.02

753

1.23

817

1.44

877

1.65

933

1.87

986

2.09

1036

2.32

1084

2.54

1130

2.77

3375

630

0.94

706

1.15

774

1.37

836

1.60

895

1.82

950

2.05

1002

2.29

1051

2.52

1098

2.76

1144

3.00

3563

657

1.08

729

1.31

795

1.54

856

1.77

913

2.01

967

2.25

1018

2.49

1067

2.74

1113

2.99

1158

3.24

3750

683

1.23

753

1.47

817

1.71

877

1.96

933

2.21

985

2.46

1035

2.71

1083

2.97

1129

3.23

1173

3.49

NOTE:Formoreinformation,seeGeneralFanPerformanceNotes.

Boldfaceindicatesfield---supplieddriveisrequired.

*Standardstatic518---733RPM,1.7BHPmax

*Mediumstatic690---936RPM,2.4BHPmax

*Highstatic838---1084RPM,3.7BHPmax

Table42

–48HC**08----3PHASE

----7.5TONVERTICALSU

PPLY

CFM

AvailableExternalStaticPressure(in.wg)

0.2

0.4

0.6

0.8

1.0

1.2

1.4

1.6

1.8

2.0

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

2250

505

0.39

595

0.54

676

0.69

750

0.86

819

1.03

884

1.21

945

1.40

1003

1.60

1059

1.80

1112

2.01

2438

532

0.47

617

0.63

694

0.79

766

0.97

833

1.15

896

1.34

955

1.54

1012

1.74

1066

1.95

1118

2.17

2625

559

0.56

640

0.73

714

0.90

783

1.08

848

1.28

909

1.47

967

1.68

1022

1.89

1075

2.11

1126

2.34

2813

588

0.67

664

0.84

735

1.03

801

1.22

864

1.42

923

1.62

980

1.84

1034

2.06

1086

2.29

1136

2.52

3000

616

0.79

689

0.97

757

1.16

821

1.36

882

1.57

939

1.79

994

2.01

1047

2.24

1098

2.47

1147

2.71

3188

646

0.92

715

1.11

780

1.31

842

1.52

901

1.74

956

1.97

1010

2.20

1061

2.43

1111

2.68

1159

2.93

3375

675

1.06

742

1.27

804

1.48

864

1.70

920

1.93

975

2.16

1027

2.40

1077

2.65

1125

2.90

1172

3.15

3563

705

1.23

769

1.44

829

1.66

886

1.89

941

2.13

994

2.37

1044

2.62

1093

2.87

1141

3.13

1186

3.40

3750

736

1.41

797

1.63

855

1.86

910

2.10

963

2.35

1014

2.60

1063

2.86

1111

3.12

1157

3.39

1202

3.66

NOTE:Formoreinformation,seeGeneralFanPerformanceNotes.

Boldfaceindicatesfield---supplieddriveisrequired.

*Standardstatic518---733RPM,1.7BHPmax

*Mediumstatic690---936RPM,2.4BHPmax

*Highstatic838---1084RPM,3.7BHPmax

48HC

Page 98: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

98

98

APPENDIX

III.FA

NPERFORMANCE(cont.)

Table43

–48HC**09----3PHASE

----8.5TONHORIZONTA

LSU

PPLY

CFM

AvailableExternalStaticPressure(in.wg)

0.2

0.4

0.6

0.8

1.0

1.2

1.4

1.6

1.8

2.0

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

2250

520

0.47

609

0.64

687

0.81

757

0.99

821

1.16

881

1.35

937

1.53

990

1.72

1040

1.91

1088

2.11

2438

547

0.57

633

0.75

708

0.94

776

1.12

839

1.31

897

1.51

952

1.70

1004

1.90

1054

2.11

1101

2.31

2625

575

0.68

657

0.88

730

1.07

796

1.27

857

1.48

915

1.68

968

1.89

1020

2.10

1068

2.32

1115

2.53

2813

604

0.81

683

1.02

753

1.23

817

1.44

877

1.65

933

1.87

986

2.09

1036

2.32

1084

2.54

1130

2.77

3000

634

0.95

709

1.17

777

1.40

839

1.62

897

1.85

952

2.08

1004

2.31

1053

2.55

1100

2.79

1145

3.03

3188

664

1.11

736

1.35

801

1.58

862

1.82

919

2.06

972

2.30

1023

2.55

1071

2.80

1118

3.05

1162

3.30

3375

694

1.29

763

1.54

826

1.79

885

2.04

941

2.29

993

2.55

1043

2.81

1090

3.07

1136

3.33

1179

3.59

3563

725

1.49

791

1.75

852

2.01

909

2.28

963

2.54

1014

2.81

1063

3.08

1110

3.36

1154

3.63

1198

3.91

3750

756

1.71

819

1.98

879

2.26

934

2.53

987

2.81

1037

3.09

1084

3.38

1130

3.66

1174

3.95

1216

4.24

NOTE:Formoreinformation,seeGeneralFanPerformanceNotes.

Boldfaceindicatesfield---supplieddriveisrequired.

*Standardstatic518---733RPM,1.7BHPmax

*Mediumstatic690---936RPM,2.4BHPmax

*Highstatic838---1084RPM,3.7BHPmax

Table44

–48HC**09----3PHASE

----8.5TONVERTICALSU

PPLY

CFM

AvailableExternalStaticPressure(in.wg)

0.2

0.4

0.6

0.8

1.0

1.2

1.4

1.6

1.8

2.0

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

RPM

BHP

2250

505

0.39

595

0.54

676

0.69

750

0.86

819

1.03

884

1.21

945

1.40

1003

1.60

1059

1.80

1112

2.01

2438

532

0.47

617

0.63

694

0.79

766

0.97

833

1.15

896

1.34

955

1.54

1012

1.74

1066

1.95

1118

2.17

2625

559

0.56

640

0.73

714

0.90

783

1.08

848

1.28

909

1.47

967

1.68

1022

1.89

1075

2.11

1126

2.34

2813

588

0.67

664

0.84

735

1.03

801

1.22

864

1.42

923

1.62

980

1.84

1034

2.06

1086

2.29

1136

2.52

3000

616

0.79

689

0.97

757

1.16

821

1.36

882

1.57

939

1.79

994

2.01

1047

2.24

1098

2.47

1147

2.71

3188

646

0.92

715

1.11

780

1.31

842

1.52

901

1.74

956

1.97

1010

2.20

1061

2.43

1111

2.68

1159

2.93

3375

675

1.06

742

1.27

804

1.48

864

1.70

920

1.93

975

2.16

1027

2.40

1077

2.65

1125

2.90

1172

3.15

3563

705

1.23

769

1.44

829

1.66

886

1.89

941

2.13

994

2.37

1044

2.62

1093

2.87

1141

3.13

1186

3.40

3750

736

1.41

797

1.63

855

1.86

910

2.10

963

2.35

1014

2.60

1063

2.86

1111

3.12

1157

3.39

1202

3.66

NOTE:Formoreinformation,seeGeneralFanPerformanceNotes.

Boldfaceindicatesfield---supplieddriveisrequired.

*Standardstatic518---733RPM,1.7BHPmax

*Mediumstatic690---936RPM,2.4BHPmax

*Highstatic838---1084RPM,3.7BHPmax

48HC

Page 99: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

99

APPENDIX IV. ELECTRICAL DATAUnit Wire/Fuse or HACR Breaker Sizing Data

UNIT NOM.

V---Ph---HzIFMTYPE

COMBUSTIONFAN MOTOR

POWEREXHAUST

NO C.O. or UNPWRD C.O.NO P.E. w/ P.E. (pwrd fr/ unit)

FLA FLA MCA

FUSEorHACRBRKR

DISC. SIZEMCA

FUSEorHACRBRKR

DISC. SIZE

FLA LRA FLA LRA

48HC**04

208/230---1---60 DD---STD 0.48 1.9 29.2 45 29 88 31.1 45 31 90

208/230---3---60STD

0.48 1.921.4 30 22 82 23.3 30 24 84

MED 18.9 25 19 87 20.8 30 21 89HIGH 19.2 25 19 105 21.1 30 21 107

460---3---60STD

0.25 1.011.8 15 12 43 12.8 15 13 44

MED 9.9 15 10 45 10.9 15 11 46HIGH 10.4 15 10 54 11.4 15 11 55

575---3---60DD---STD

0.24 1.99.3 15 10 42 11.2 15 12 44

MED 7.2 15 7 43 9.1 15 9 45HIGH 7.3 15 7 49 9.2 15 19 51

48HC**05

208/230---1---60 DD---STD 0.48 1.9 36.1 50 35 127 38.0 50 37 129

208/230---3---60STD

0.48 1.925.9 30 26 93 27.8 40 28 95

MED 23.4 30 23 98 25.3 30 25 100HIGH 23.7 30 23 116 25.6 30 26 112

460---3---60DD---STD

0.25 1.012.7 15 13 47 13.7 20 14 48

MED 10.8 15 11 49 11.8 15 12 50HIGH 11.3 15 11 58 12.3 15 12 59

575---3---60STD

0.24 1.910.9 15 11 43 12.8 15 13 45

MED 8.8 15 9 44 10.7 15 11 46HIGH 8.9 15 9 50 10.8 15 11 52

48HC**06

208/230---1---60 DD---STD 0.48 1.9 40.1 60 39 144 42.0 60 41 146

208/230---3---60DD---STD

0.48 1.928.7. 40 28 120 30.6 45 31 122

MED 26.5 40 26 143 28.4 40 28 145HIGH 28.8 40 29 169 30.7 45 31 171

460---3---60DD---STD

0.25 1.013.7 20 14 58 14.7 20 15 59

MED 12.3 15 12 69 13.3 20 13 70HIGH 13.1 20 13 82 14.1 20 14 83

575---3---60DD---STD

0.24 1.911.3 15 12 46 13.2 15 14 48

MED 9.3 15 9 53 11.2 15 11 55HIGH 10.1 15 10 64 12.0 15 12 66

See: “Legend and Notes for Table 9” on page 38.

48HC

Page 100: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

100

APPENDIX IV. ELECTRICAL DATA (cont.)

Table 9 — Unit Wire/Fuse or HACR Breaker Sizing Data (cont)UNIT NOM.

V---Ph---HzIFMTYPE

COMBUSTIONFAN MOTOR

POWEREXHAUST

w/ PWRD C.O.NO P.E. w/ P.E. (pwrd fr/ unit)

FLA FLA MCA

FUSEorHACRBRKR

DISC. SIZEMCA

FUSEorHACRBRKR

DISC. SIZE

FLA LRA FLA LRA

48HC**04

208/230---1---60 DD---STD 0.48 1.9 34.0 50 34 93 35.9 50 36 95

208/230---3---60STD

0.48 1.926.2 30 27 87 28.1 35 29 89

MED 23.7 30 24 92 25.6 30 26 94HIGH 24.0 30 25 110 25.9 30 27 112

460---3---60STD

0.25 1.014.0 20 14 45 15.0 20 16 46

MED 12.1 15 12 47 13.1 15 13 48HIGH 12.6 15 13 56 13.6 20 14 57

575---3---60DD---STD

0.24 1.911.0 15 12 44 12.9 15 14 46

MED 8.9 15 9 45 10.8 15 11 47HIGH 9.0 15 9 51 10.9 15 11 53

48HC**05

208/230---1---60 DD---STD 0.48 1.9 40.9 60 41 132 42.8 60 43 134

208/230---3---60STD

0.48 1.930.7 40 31 98 32.6 45 34 100

MED 28.2 40 29 103 30.1 40 31 105HIGH 28.5 40 29 121 30.4 40 31 123

460---3---60STD

0.25 1.014.9 20 15 49 15.9 20 16 50

MED 13.0 15 13 51 14.0 20 14 52HIGH 13.5 20 14 60 14.5 20 15 61

575---3---60DD---STD

0.24 1.912.6 15 13 45 14.5 20 15 47

MED 10.5 15 11 46 12.4 15 13 48HIGH 10.6 15 11 52 12.5 15 13 54

48HC**06

208/230---1---60 DD---STD 0.48 1.9 44.9 60 44 149 46.8 60 47 151

208/230---3---60DD---STD

0.48 1.933.5 45 34 125 35.4 50 36 127

MED 31.3 45 31 148 33.2 45 34 150HIGH 33.6 45 34 174 35.5 50 36 176

460---3---60DD---STD

0.25 1.015.9 20 16 60 16.9 20 17 61

MED 14.5 20 15 71 15.5 20 16 72HIGH 15.3 20 16 84 16.3 20 17 85

575---3---60DD---STD

0.24 1.913.0 15 13 48 14.9 20 16 50

MED 11.0 15 11 55 12.9 15 13 57HIGH 11.8 15 12 66 13.7 15 14 68

LEGEND:BRKR --- Circuit breakerCO --- Convenient outletDD --- Direct drive

indoor fan motorDISC --- DisconnectFLA --- Full load ampsIFM --- Indoor fan motorLRA --- Locked rotor ampsMCA --- Minimum circuit ampsPE --- Power exhaustPWRD CO --- Powered convenient outletUNPWR CO --- Unpowered convenient outletNOTES:1. In compliance with NEC requirements for multimotor andcombination load equipment (refer to NEC Articles 430 and440), the overcurrent protective device for the unit shall befuse or HACR breaker. Canadian units may be fuse or circuitbreaker.

2. Unbalanced 3-Phase Supply VoltageNever operate a motor where a phase imbalance in supplyvoltage is greater than 2%. Use the following formula to de-termine the percentage of voltage imbalance.

% Voltage Imbalance = 100 xmax voltage deviation from average voltage

average voltage

48HC

Page 101: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

101

APPENDIX IV. ELECTRICAL DATA (cont.)

Table 45 – Unit Wire/MOCP Sizing Data

NOM.

V---Ph---Hz

IFMTYPE

COMBUSTIONFAN MOTOR

POWEREXHAUST

NO C.O. or UNPWR C.O.

NO P.E. w/ P.E. (pwrd fr/ unit)

FLA FLA MCAFUSE orHACRBRKR

DISC. SIZEMCA

FUSE orHACRBRKR

DISC. SIZE

FLA LRA FLA LRA

48HC*A0

7(1---stage

cool) 208/230---3---60

STD0.48

32.0 50 31 148 35.8 50 36 152MED 34.3 50 34 185 38.1 50 38 189HIGH 41.8 60 43 211 45.6 60 47 215

460---3---60STD

0.25 1.816.3 25 16 75 18.1 25 18 77

MED 17.1 25 17 94 18.9 25 19 96HIGH 21.1 30 22 107 22.9 30 24 109

575---3---60STD

0.24 3.812.9 20 13 61 16.7 20 17 65

MED 13.3 20 13 76 17.1 20 17 80HIGH 16.1 20 16 90 19.9 25 21 94

48HC*D0

8(2---stage

cool) 208/230---3---60

STD0.48 3.8

38.8 50 41 191 42.6 50 45 195MED 41.1 50 43 228 44.9 50 48 232HIGH 49.0 60 52 254 52.8 60 56 258

460---3---60STD

0.25 1.817.9 20 19 95 19.7 25 21 97

MED 18.7 25 20 114 20.5 25 22 116HIGH 23.1 30 24 127 24.9 30 26 129

575---3---60STD

0.24 3.813.1 15 14 77 16.9 20 18 81

MED 13.5 15 14 92 17.3 20 19 96HIGH 16.6 20 17 106 20.4 25 22 110

48HC*D0

9(2---stage

cool) 208/230---3---60

STD0.48 3.8

39.0 50 41 191 42.8 50 45 195MED 39.0 50 41 202 42.8 50 45 206HIGH 43.8 50 46 245 47.6 60 51 249

460---3---60STD

0.25 1.818.2 20 19 95 20.0 25 21 97

MED 18.2 20 19 101 20.0 25 21 103HIGH 20.0 25 21 123 21.8 25 23 125

575---3---60STD

0.24 3.814.4 20 15 85 18.2 20 20 89

MED 14.0 20 15 89 17.8 20 19 93HIGH 14.8 20 16 100 18.6 20 20 104

NOM.

V---Ph---Hz

IFMTYPE

COMBUSTIONFAN MOTOR

POWEREXHAUST

w/ PWRD C.O.

NO P.E. w/ P.E. (pwrd fr/ unit)

FLA FLA MCAFUSE orHACRBRKR

DISC. SIZEMCA

FUSE orHACRBRKR

DISC. SIZE

FLA LRA FLA LRA

48HC*A0

7(1---stage

cool) 208/230---3---60

STD0.48

36.8 50 37 153 40.6 50 41 157MED 39.1 50 39 190 42.9 60 44 194HIGH 46.6 60 48 216 50.4 60 52 220

460---3---60STD

0.25 1.818.5 25 19 77 20.3 30 21 79

MED 19.3 25 19 96 21.1 30 22 98HIGH 23.3 30 24 109 25.1 30 26 111

575---3---60STD

0.24 3.814.6 20 15 63 18.4 25 19 67

MED 15.0 20 15 78 18.8 25 19 82HIGH 17.8 25 18 92 21.6 25 23 96

48HC*D0

8(2---stage

cool) 208/230---3---60

STD0.48 3.8

43.6 50 46 196 47.4 60 51 200MED 45.9 50 49 233 49.7 60 53 237HIGH 53.8 60 58 259 57.6 70 62 263

460---3---60STD

0.25 1.820.1 25 21 97 21.9 25 23 99

MED 20.9 25 22 116 22.7 25 24 118HIGH 25.3 30 27 129 27.1 30 29 131

575---3---60STD

0.24 3.814.8 20 16 79 18.6 20 20 83

MED 15.2 20 16 94 19.0 25 21 98HIGH 18.3 20 19 108 22.1 25 24 112

48HC*D0

9(2---stage

cool) 208/230---3---60

STD0.48 3.8

43.8 50 46 196 47.6 60 51 200MED 43.8 50 46 207 47.6 60 51 211HIGH 48.6 60 52 250 52.4 60 56 254

460---3---60STD

0.25 1.820.4 25 22 97 22.2 25 24 99

MED 20.4 25 22 103 22.2 25 24 105HIGH 22.2 25 24 125 24.0 30 26 127

575---3---60STD

0.24 3.816.1 20 17 87 19.9 25 22 91

MED 15.7 20 17 91 19.5 25 21 95HIGH 16.5 20 18 102 20.3 25 22 106

LEGENDFLA --- Full Load Amps MCA --- Minimum Circuit AmpsIFM --- Indoor Fan Motor CO --- Convenience OutletLRA --- Locked Rotor Amps DISC --- DisconnectRLA --- Rated Load Amps PE --- Power ExhaustOFM --- Outdoor Fan Motor

% Voltage Imbalance = 100 xmax voltage deviation from average voltage

average voltage

Example: Supply voltage is 230-3-60

AB = 224 vBC = 231 vAC = 226 v

Average Voltage =(224 + 231 + 226)

=681

3 3

= 227

Determine maximum deviation from average voltage.(AB) 227 – 224 = 3 v(BC) 231 – 227 = 4 v(AC) 227 – 226 = 1 vMaximum deviation is 4 v.Determine percent of voltage imbalance.

% Voltage Imbalance = 100 x4

227

= 1.76%

This amount of phase imbalance is satisfactory as it is below the maximumallowable 2%.IMPORTANT: If the supply voltage phase imbalance is more than 2%,contact your local electric utility company immediately.

48HC

Page 102: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

102

APPENDIX V. MOTORMASTER SENSOR LOCATIONS

C10273

Fig. 90 -- 48HC*A04 Outdoor Circuiting

C08260

Fig. 91 -- 48HC*A05/06 Outdoor Circuiting

C10274

Fig. 92 -- 48HC*A07 Outdoor Circuiting

C08262

Fig. 93 -- 48HC*A08 Outdoor Circuiting

48HC

Page 103: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

103

APPENDIX V. (cont.) MOTORMASTER SENSOR LOCATIONS

C08263

Fig. 94 -- 48HC*A09 Outdoor Circuiting

Copyright 2010 Carrier Corp. S 7310 W. Morris St. S Indianapolis, IN 46231 Printed in U.S.A. Edition Date: 04/10

Manufacturer reserves the right to change, at any time, specifications and designs without notice and without obligations.

Catalog No: 48HC---01SM

Replaces: NEW

48HC

Page 104: Service and Maintenance Instructions - Sigler Commercialsiglercommercial.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/04/48...48HC*04---09 Nominal 3 to 8.5 Tons With Puron (R---410A) Refrigerant Service

104

UNIT START-UP CHECKLISTI. PRELIMINARY INFORMATION:MODEL NO.:DATE: ______________

SERIAL NO: _____________________________________TECHNICIAN: ___________________________________BUILDING LOCATION:____________________________

II. PRE-START-UP (insert check mark in box as each item is completed):j VERIFY THAT ALL PACKAGING MATERIALS HAVE BEEN REMOVED FROM UNITj VERIFY THAT CONDENSATE CONNECTION IS INSTALLED PER INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONSj VERIFY THAT FLUE HOOD IS INSTALLEDj CHECK ALL ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS AND TERMINALS FOR TIGHTNESSj CHECK TO ENSURE NO WIRES ARE TOUCHING REFRIGERANT TUBING OR SHARP EDGESj CHECK GAS PIPING FOR LEAKSj CHECK THAT RETURN--AIR FILTER IS CLEAN AND IN PLACEj VERIFY THAT UNIT INSTALLATION IS LEVELj CHECK FAN WHEEL AND PROPELLER FOR LOCATION IN HOUSING/ORIFICE AND VERIFY SETSCREW IS TIGHTj VERIFY PULLEY ALIGNMENT AND BELT TENSION ARE CORRECT

III. START-UP

ELECTRICAL

SUPPLY VOLTAGE L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1

COMPRESSOR AMPS L1 L2 L2

INDOOR FAN AMPS L1 L2 L2

TEMPERATURES

OUTDOOR-AIR TEMPERATURE DB WB

RETURN-AIR TEMPERATURE DB WB

COOLING SUPPLY AIR DB WB

GAS HEAT SUPPLY AIR DB

PRESSURES

GAS INLET PRESSURE IN. WG

GAS MANIFOLD PRESSURE IN. WG (LOW FIRE) IN. WG (HI FIRE)

REFRIGERANT SUCTION PSIG TEMP _F

REFRIGERANT DISCHARGE PSIG TEMP _F

j VERIFY REFRIGERANT CHARGE USING CHARGING CHARTSj VERIFY THAT 3--PHASE SCROLL COMPRESSOR IS ROTATING IN CORRECT DIRECTION

Copyright 2010 Carrier Corp. S 7310 W. Morris St. S Indianapolis, IN 46231 Printed in U.S.A. Edition Date: 04/10

Manufacturer reserves the right to change, at any time, specifications and designs without notice and without obligations.

Catalog No: 48HC---01SM

Replaces: NEW

48HC